05.11.2012 Views

Michael J. Thompson Stephen Eric Bronner Wadood Hamad - Logos

Michael J. Thompson Stephen Eric Bronner Wadood Hamad - Logos

Michael J. Thompson Stephen Eric Bronner Wadood Hamad - Logos

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

Richard Couto<br />

Henry Pachter<br />

Abbas Amanat<br />

Stanley Aronowitz<br />

Ali Hossaini<br />

summer 2003<br />

volume two - issue three<br />

Taxing Democracy: Politics and the<br />

Bush Tax Cut<br />

Lies and the Distortion of Democracy<br />

Wither Iraq: From Despotism to Occupation<br />

The Incidental Liberation of Iraq<br />

Who Are the Palestinians?<br />

Iran’s Social Revolution<br />

Rethinking C. Wright Mills<br />

Vision of the Gods<br />

Photography by Ira Cohen<br />

Fiction by Thomas de Zengotita<br />

Poetry by Andy Clausen<br />

REVIEWS:<br />

Terror and Liberalism, by Paul Berman<br />

reviewed by Kurt Jacobsen<br />

The History of Socialism by Joshua Muravchik<br />

reviewed by Jason Schulman<br />

Why George Orwell?, by Christopher Hitchens<br />

reviewed by Desmond MacNamara<br />

Straw Dogs by John Gray<br />

reviewed by Diana Judd<br />

The Specter of Democracy, by Dick Howard<br />

reviewed by Robert Antonio<br />

© <strong>Logos</strong> 2003


F<br />

<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

Taxing Democracy:<br />

Politics and the Bush Tax Cut<br />

by<br />

<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003<br />

The science of economics is a political science.<br />

—Max Weber<br />

ew domestic political issues have been debated with more passion than<br />

the tax cut that was proposed by the Bush administration and recently<br />

passed by Congress. The tax cuts have been characterized as everything from<br />

a giveaway to the rich to a stimulus package for an ailing economy. Political<br />

rhetoric frequently coalesces with “social science,” statistics and economic<br />

argumentation, but—interestingly enough—the political character of<br />

decision-making on tax policy has tended to disappear from the public<br />

debate. What I think is happening, however, is not simply a rethinking of tax<br />

codes or a move away from the redistributional character of the post-war<br />

American welfare state. Rather, there is a reformation of American democracy<br />

through the policy prescriptions of the Bush administration where the acute<br />

separation of economics from politics may very well lead to an erosion of the<br />

democratic character of the United States. What characterizes the political<br />

rhetoric of the Bush administration and neoconservatives?<br />

Without question, linking taxes and democracy has been a consistent theme<br />

in American politics. From the birth of the republic, through the massive<br />

inequities of the Gilded Age and the great redistributive policies of the New<br />

Deal, the War On Poverty and the Great Society, there has always existed a<br />

consistent link between the emergence of the state as a participant in the<br />

public sphere and the expansion of democracy, especially in economic terms.<br />

But recently, the view has emerged that the expansion of the state and the<br />

services it provides, its public goods—what we commonly call the welfare<br />

state—stands in sharp contradiction to the values of liberty, freedom and<br />

democracy. The more the state encroaches on me, the citizen, the less free I<br />

am; the less money I am able to keep from what I earn, the more the<br />

government is interfering with my liberty. This is the essential rhetoric of<br />

anti-tax conservatives like Grover Norquist, one of George W. Bush’s top<br />

political advisors:


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

Look, the center right coalition in American politics today is<br />

best understood as a coalition of groups and individuals [and]<br />

the issue that brings them to politics [is that] what they want<br />

from the government is to be left alone. Taxpayers, don’t raise<br />

my taxes. Property owners, don’t restrict or limit my property.<br />

Home-schoolers, let me educate my own kids. Gun owners,<br />

don’t restrict my Second Amendment rights. All communities<br />

of faith, Evangelical Christians, conservative Catholics,<br />

Mormons, Muslims, Orthodox Jews, people want to practice<br />

their own religion and be left alone to raise their own kids. 1<br />

Known as the “leave us alone” coalition, such is the ideological context that<br />

includes the politics of the most recent tax cuts; an ideology grounded in a<br />

much broader conception of society, politics and culture; one premised on a<br />

curious mix of libertarian individualism with a provincial, parochial<br />

communitarianism. But this is merely a surface phenomenon. It appeals only<br />

to the conservative sentiments of a public that has been ideologically dragged<br />

to the right over the past two and a half decades. But the material impact of<br />

the tax cuts are typically felt at the local levels. This is, in part, a result of tax<br />

cutting policies which begin at the federal level and have trickled down over<br />

the years into the policies of states.<br />

As federal tax cuts increased throughout the 1980s and 1990s there was an<br />

increased pressure states and cities to shoulder the cost of schools and other<br />

social services. The politics of the tax cut must therefore be seen first and<br />

foremost as a broad attempt to reorient the way in which American<br />

democracy was heading since the New Deal which itself was based on the<br />

realization that the effects of capitalism on society required the intervention<br />

of the state in order to counteract the effects of what <strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

has called the “whip of the market” from staggering economic inequality and<br />

poverty reduction and cyclical economic crises. Later, issues ranging from<br />

pollution to enhanced social services and programs were on the minds of the<br />

public and began to enter the political agenda of the Democratic Party. It was<br />

a conception of democracy that realized that unequal economic power<br />

rendered “equal” political rights practically meaningless and that only<br />

through the fair distribution of social wealth could political and social rights<br />

truly be extended and realized.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

One of the main functions of tax policy is the redistribution of income and it<br />

is around this issue that the rallying cry for those who seek the reformation of<br />

the tax code in America is organized. Whatever else taxes may actually do as<br />

an instrument of public policy, the core argument used for the tax cuts has<br />

consistently been to link economic productivity (the welfare of everyone) and<br />

personal income (the welfare of the individual or family). It is, in so many<br />

ways, a flawless political strategy—one that hits Americans where they feel<br />

they need it the most, even though the numbers do not work out in their<br />

benefit. Most taxpayers therefore see their responsibility as restricted to the<br />

sphere of the local. In this sense, an element of racism often enters the picture<br />

once largely white and better-off municipalities pay taxes that are<br />

redistributed to inner city neighborhoods located close by. What is seen by<br />

the average taxpayer is therefore not a set of goods and services, but a<br />

complex tax system that is impenetrable and, at the local level, even seen as<br />

simply unfair where ailing inner city schools require tax revenues collected at<br />

the state or county level from more affluent, largely white suburbs.<br />

Redistribution is one of the main targets of the Bush tax cut and its impact<br />

will be substantial. Recent data show that, even before the current tax cut was<br />

put into effect, the top 400 wealthiest taxpayers paid less taxes in 2000 than<br />

in both 1995 and in 1992. In the past nine years, the incomes of the “top<br />

400 tax payers increased 15 times the rate of the bottom 90 percent of<br />

Americans.” 2 And it is important to point out in this context that the top 1<br />

percent of income earners in America have a 26 percent share of the tax<br />

burden while their share of the Bush tax cuts is over 50 percent. 3<br />

However we may view the rhetoric of the tax cuts, what is becoming ever<br />

more apparent is a gradual destruction of the public sector and the expansion<br />

of the market to more domains of society. In this sense, the Bush tax cuts are<br />

not merely an expression of fiscal policy. They also fundamentally serve a<br />

larger project of redirecting the way that American democracy has functioned<br />

throughout the post-war era. This redirection involves a wholesale<br />

transformation in the way that government can act to soften the harsh<br />

impacts of the capitalist economy whether it is in the form of economic<br />

inequality or environmental degradation.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

Tax Reform and Political Opportunism: Bush in Context<br />

THE TREND TOWARD TAX REFORM in the 1980s was, it should be admitted,<br />

the result of many legitimate economic pressures. The problem was not in<br />

the changing economics of global capitalism but in the way the politics of the<br />

right in America—as well as other nations—used this economic pressure for<br />

its own ideological ends. This can be explained in the flowing way. During<br />

the post-war years, there was a general consensus among policy makers that<br />

taxes should be progressive and used as tools for economic management.<br />

Throughout the 1950s and 1960s, this Keynesian logic made possible<br />

spending on large social programs and the investment in infrastructure.<br />

Business and the wealthy paid large marginal tax rates as opposed to the poor,<br />

working, and middle classes. This form of redistribution that allowed<br />

working people and even entire regions of the country to migrate to<br />

improved living conditions and to enjoy improved social services and public<br />

goods.<br />

Arguments were often made about the degree to which these taxes were<br />

indeed progressive. Political élites—more often than not representatives of<br />

business interests—made the argument time and again that a reduction of<br />

taxes would mean an increase in economic growth and productivity (a rise in<br />

GDP). However, such political arguments had very little support. First, there<br />

was the problem of politics. Americans overwhelmingly supported progressive<br />

taxation since the majority of them benefited from it directly. But next, the<br />

few studies that were made on the link between taxation and economic<br />

growth showed that there was no relationship at all. 4 Anti-tax political<br />

rhetoric therefore lacked, through the 1950s and 1960s and well into the<br />

1970s, any political support from the citizenry of the United States and also<br />

any empirical support from the social science establishment.<br />

This situation began to change in the late 1970s. For one thing, as American<br />

workers began to prosper they also started moving up in income tax brackets<br />

and getting hit by increasingly higher tax rates. This was part of the system’s<br />

design, and it also showed the old system was actually working. Tax revenues<br />

were supposed to grow automatically since “as the economy expanded,<br />

inflation pushed more and more individuals into higher and higher tax<br />

brackets as their nominal incomes increased.” 5 The tax system that had been<br />

devised and implemented in the 1950s and early 1960s began to lose its<br />

redistributive impact since the classes that, in the past, had benefited from<br />

the redistribution of wealth were now being taxed at ever higher rates and the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

benefits were no longer as clear as they once were. The result was a sharp<br />

increase in political pressure toward tax reform which, with the election of<br />

Ronald Reagan in 1980, led to a wholesale redirection of American<br />

government and its tax policies from the weakening of government agencies<br />

such as Housing and Urban Development (HUD) to an expanded federal<br />

deficit and the start of a widening gap in income and wealth that continues<br />

to grow today.<br />

The economic facts were merely an entrée for neoconservatives to argue their<br />

case for the minimal state and the reduction of taxes on corporations and the<br />

wealthy. Tax reform was necessary, but not the sort of draconian cuts in<br />

public services and institutions that served the working poor that were<br />

inevitably enacted. Instead of a reworking of increasingly complex tax codes<br />

and regulations, tax cuts were initiated that helped exacerbate inequalities<br />

that were growing from the impacts of a post-industrial economy. What the<br />

conservatives of the “Reagan Revolution” did was to focus opportunistically<br />

on public dissatisfaction about growing tax burdens created by a system that<br />

was in need of reform and use this public sentiment to trample the welfare<br />

state.<br />

On the whole, the statistical data is clear for anyone who has any casual<br />

acquaintance with the econometric studies and economic data: since 1980,<br />

there is a statistically significant relationship between the level of taxation and<br />

economic growth: as taxes increased, economic performance lessened in terms<br />

of GDP growth. This situation changed from the 1950s, 1960s and 1970s<br />

because there was a reconfiguration of global capitalism. From the 1980s<br />

onward, there was an increased global mobility of capital and the result was<br />

that corporations were able to move spatially to avoid costs. Taxes were<br />

among these costs. By 1990, this was a general theory of business planning<br />

with <strong>Michael</strong> Porter’s book, The Competitive Advantage of Nations, serving as<br />

one of the central texts coaching businesses in how to avoid the costs of<br />

producing in only one site, especially a site that was not “friendly” to business<br />

in terms of tax rates and regulatory limitations. Corporations were<br />

encouraged to move to places where the tax burden—as well as wages and<br />

other limitations—were less prohibitive to profits. In the United States, this<br />

meant moving many factory jobs out of the northeastern states, where labor<br />

unions were strong and businesses taxes were higher at the state and local<br />

levels, to the south or to other countries (i.e., Mexico).<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

As the global economy began to change, the political economy of American<br />

taxation began to change as well. But this is where the crucial issue arises:<br />

even though there clearly were economic pressures brought on by this<br />

restructuring and the American tax system was in need of reform to remain a<br />

viable method of redistribution, the political reality was something quite<br />

different. The populist cry for tax reform was translated by the Reagan<br />

administration into a project of restructuring the state—a project which is<br />

still ongoing—where the role of the state in providing services was bypassed<br />

in favor of privatization and the redistributive functioning of taxation was<br />

rolled back. Legitimate needs for tax reform were therefore twisted by<br />

conservatives in an attempt to reorganize government and transform<br />

American democracy.<br />

Redefining and Restructuring American Democracy<br />

In 1843, the German economist Wilhelm Roscher wrote that political<br />

economy is not merely the “art of acquiring wealth; it is a political science<br />

based on evaluating and governing people.” 6 Economics is therefore a field<br />

that is fundamentally concerned with the very idea of the public good, it is<br />

far from being a value-free science. This is something that has been lost in<br />

recent debates on the politics of the Bush tax cut. The assumption—or even<br />

the outright belief—remains that there are legitimate economic reasons that<br />

can justify the various tax cuts which, and this is usually openly admitted,<br />

explicitly favor the wealthy. Inequalities that are generated from the tax cuts<br />

are considered “justifiable” first on supposedly economic grounds (i.e.,<br />

promoting growth and employment) and, at times, on ethical grounds, in the<br />

sense that everyone deserves to keep whatever they “earn.” But neither of<br />

these contentions actually make sense. No empirical evidence links tax cuts<br />

on wealthier income earners and employment, nor is there any reliable<br />

evidence that supports a link between tax cuts on individual income and<br />

economic growth, even if there is evidence, as was discussed above, that<br />

corporate tax rates do affect growth rates. Economic policy is being done for<br />

political ends and the actual content and intention of this politics needs to be<br />

seen for what it is: a reconfiguration of American democracy. This<br />

reconfiguration means a retreat from the idea that the state ought to<br />

meliorate class differences, the acceptance of the idea that political democracy<br />

is somehow indifferent to economic and social inequality, and toward a<br />

situation where the market extends to almost every aspect of public life.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

It is interesting to note that the Bush administration openly admits that its<br />

tax cuts favor the wealthy. This is a marked change from even twenty years<br />

ago when the political theorist Philip Green could write that “[s]pecial<br />

advantages for economic élites, as in the United States tax code, are<br />

introduced sub rosa, never proclaimed out loud. No one defends legislation<br />

by suggesting that the better class should be rewarded more and the inferior<br />

class less.” 7 Today, there has been a shift in the political sensitivity to social<br />

inequality and class division.<br />

It is a specific political philosophy, or ideology, that essentially defines the<br />

Bush tax cuts. The Bush administration’s economic argument that the tax<br />

cuts will somehow stimulate a dragging economy and increase employment<br />

has little support in theory and no support empirically. The tax cuts are<br />

proposed as part of a stimulus package, one that will promote economic<br />

growth. But, as James K. Galbraith has recently pointed out, these cuts are<br />

not a growth policy for two crucial reasons: “They are targeted to the<br />

wealthy, and they are back-loaded so as to conceal their true long-term<br />

impact on budget deficits.” 8 The extent of the tax cuts is therefore structured<br />

so that the real effects on the budget will not show up for another ten years or<br />

so since tax cuts on the wealthy will continue to diminish tax revenues and<br />

therefore increasingly bankrupt the state. Of course, this is not obvious when<br />

one examines the tax plan since such easily perceived hardship would cause at<br />

least a small degree of backlash.<br />

It is well-known economic logic that growth could be stimulated by new and<br />

increased government spending, something that has not even been publicly<br />

debated by the Bush administration’s economic policy advisors. This is<br />

because it would put the United States back in a Keynesian policy state of<br />

mind; and this means that there would be legitimacy in refunding the state<br />

and this would give some weight to political interests that want to expand the<br />

welfare state, government programs, regulatory agencies and other things<br />

which would be antithetical to the pro-business mentality and interests of the<br />

neoconservative agenda. In other words, once the state becomes more active<br />

in the economy, there is more likelihood that that state will also be used for<br />

expanding social programs. This runs directly counter to the current trend of<br />

shrinking the state and its influence in both economy and society.<br />

There is also the question of economic growth and job creation. This issue<br />

has been at the core of the Bush administration’s arguments for the tax cuts<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

as well as a broad conservative wave of support. Heritage Foundation<br />

economist Mark Wilson claimed in a recent study that if the tax cuts were<br />

made retroactive to the beginning of 2003, 1.6 million jobs would be added<br />

to the economy by 2011 and expand economic output by another $248<br />

billion. 9 But there have been no academic economists who have been able to<br />

verify these findings in a single peer reviewed professional journal, and it is<br />

little surprise why. The rationale is classic “supply-side” economic thinking:<br />

the more money that is poured into the economy by letting people keep what<br />

they earn—so the supply-siders argue, in theory of course—the more society<br />

as a whole will benefit since people—especially the wealthy—will be more<br />

likely to invest in the economy and start new enterprises. A “free” market<br />

liberated from any type of restraint, regulation and public accountability is<br />

therefore the optimal arrangement for liberty and democracy. 10 This is the<br />

essential view that informs neoconservative political and social thought, but it<br />

is not a fact of economic science. Recall 1993 when there was an increase in<br />

the top income tax rate from 33 percent to 39.6 percent and still there was an<br />

increase in capital investment and a flourishing economy throughout the<br />

remainder of the 1990s. From the point of view of empirical evidence, the<br />

conservative argument quite simply makes no sense.<br />

It is more correct to say, then, that there is a political imperative behind this<br />

shift in economic policy, and its agenda is the fundamental transformation of<br />

American democracy as we have known it throughout the post-war period.<br />

The primary motivation is the ideological view that the state needs to be<br />

reduced, to be minimized. The conservative economist Robert Barro of<br />

Harvard University and the Hoover Institution put it most bluntly:<br />

One attraction of tax cuts and deficits is that they starve the<br />

government of revenue and thereby promote spending<br />

restraint. This worked particularly well in the 1980s. The<br />

Reagan tax reductions were a proclamation that the growth<br />

in government had to stop—and, with something of a lag,<br />

that happened from the mid-1980s through the 1990s. . . .<br />

[M]ost people’s income comes from their skill and effort<br />

(or, through inheritance, from the skill and effort of their<br />

parents). People deserve to keep most of what they have<br />

produced and earned, after sharing reasonably in the tax<br />

burden for financing a limited government. 11<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

In many ways, Barro’s comment outlines in brief the basic ideology behind<br />

the politics of the tax cuts. The starving of the state is part and parcel of a<br />

political philosophy that sees an increase in the extent to which the market—<br />

and therefore not public, but private interests—control many, if not most, of<br />

the production and supply of public goods and services (school vouchers are<br />

one example of this). But the reality of the implications of a social policy<br />

driven by low taxes is never highlighted by any of these thinkers or writers.<br />

Take California, a state that passed Proposition 13 in 1978 which says that<br />

property taxes cannot be greater than 1 percent of the actual sales price on<br />

real estate with a limited increase of 2 percent per year. Although the tax was<br />

clearly something that most homeowners supported—and still do, it still has<br />

a support rating of 60 percent in the state—the benefits flowed to<br />

corporations whose property taxes on land and buildings are under-assessed<br />

and therefore drain the state, and its municipalities, of essential tax dollars. 12<br />

California now faces a $38 billion deficit and its public services have<br />

suffered—its schools are consistently ranked in the bottom half of the nation<br />

when it comes to spending per-student.<br />

Why people accept this situation is a crucial question that needs to be asked.<br />

For one thing, there is an ideological explanation. Taxes themselves are not<br />

seen as public goods and services, but as redistributive mechanisms to those<br />

that do not deserve it—i.e., the poor—or as funding an ever-expanding state<br />

and government waste. This is, in part, the product of the rhetoric of the<br />

Reagan administration and its attack on welfare. But there has also been a<br />

general consensus in the media—one that has become almost universally<br />

accepted—that government programs are inherently inefficient and never<br />

benefit those that they intent to help. This negative view of government<br />

programs is partly due to a certain ideology that has been nurtured by<br />

conservative think tanks, writers and politicians for more than three decades.<br />

In this sense, the middle class in America sees fewer of its interests in<br />

common with the lower class, even though this is clearly not the case. 13<br />

As this divide has increased—especially as the racialization of this divide also<br />

has increased—the largely white middle class sees the social cost of promoting<br />

more equality through taxation as increasingly unfair since it sees itself as<br />

shouldering much of this burden, never mind the fact that the middle class,<br />

too, has been affected by falling incomes and will increasingly see a slide in<br />

their own quality of life and the public institutions around them. This<br />

ideological explanation translates into a political reality where the lower<br />

classes are largely disenfranchised and the middle and upper classes would<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

prefer to keep their incomes safe from taxation and have little interest in an<br />

increase in social equality and do not see the deteriorating quality of their<br />

public services as being connected with dwindling tax revenues. Either way,<br />

this cleavage between the lower and middle classes is politically debilitating<br />

since the Democratic Party sees its traditional constituency of the working<br />

poor and middle class workers with divergent political interests even though<br />

they have more in common with each other than either of them do with the<br />

wealthy. The fact is that fighting for improved public services and worker<br />

protections of all kinds are things that both the working poor and the middle<br />

class share as common interests. The problem remains articulating a political<br />

message that bridges this divide.<br />

This reorientation of American democracy puts markets and private interest<br />

over that of the public interest. Indeed, this has been the mainstay of<br />

American public life, but the new phase of this trend threatens to make it a<br />

more permanent reality. The reality of this situation can be seen most<br />

explicitly in the rise in economic inequality in the United States. The income<br />

tax was started in 1914 as a “class tax,” one that took from the wealthy and<br />

redistributed to the rest of society. This turned into a “mass tax” during the<br />

Second World War to accrue monies for the war effort. However, it is<br />

precisely the notion of class that has been allowed to drop out of the<br />

discussion. Class is at the center of the tax cut debate because, as Barro<br />

incorrectly states, it is not the case that wealthy people are the ones that<br />

“produce” and therefore “earn” what they receive in terms of income.<br />

Capitalism is an economic system that produces profits from social labor; the<br />

fact that corporate CEOs make more than 400 times the income of the<br />

workers that actually produce the products and services can hardly be<br />

justified through an argument based along the lines of earning one’s pay.<br />

This may be an extreme example, but all one needs to do is look at any<br />

corporation that develops, say, new technologies. Most, if not all, new<br />

technologies are developed in labs and research departments by Ph.D.s or<br />

other highly-skilled researchers earning middle income salaries whereas<br />

owners earn profits and income that are exponentially higher.<br />

What this discussion points to is that the very meaning of democracy in<br />

America is being transformed, perhaps transmogrified is a better term. In<br />

place of public concerns and the public interest, it is private interest that has<br />

now become paramount in social policy. Whereas the general character of the<br />

American welfare state in the post-war period implicitly recognized that<br />

political democracy and political equality are practically meaningless without<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

some degree of economic equality and that capitalism as an economic system<br />

had serious deleterious effects on society, we now see an institutional<br />

transformation where the welfare state is being rolled back to allow the<br />

market once again—as in the 19th century—to operate freely irrespective of<br />

its social costs. The peculiar caste of American liberalism has typically been<br />

seen as strongly Lockean: private property and the ability to accumulate<br />

property indefinitely and, therefore, wealth, has always been its backbone.<br />

But there have also been other aspects of liberalism: those that stood up for<br />

the unpropertied and those whose interests were not served by the free<br />

activities of those who owned private property. Indeed, the expansion of<br />

American liberalism came not—as neoconservatives have been arguing in<br />

recent years—from the ability of individuals to own property and pursue an<br />

“American dream,” but rather from labor unions and working people that<br />

pushed for democratic reforms in the economy, the state and society. 14<br />

Democracy is now being translated into a laissez-faire libertarian reality: as<br />

the organization of the entirety of society around the pivot of self-interest<br />

subject to minor legal restraints by a minimal state.<br />

Bankrupting the state is therefore a primary aim of the conservative<br />

revolution. The very core of any substantive democracy, the public sphere,<br />

has slowly eroded through the further separation between state, society and<br />

economy, a separation made initially by Locke and then intensified by<br />

revolutionary thinkers like Thomas Paine. But American democracy was not<br />

initially grounded in Lockean notions of liberalism as writers such as Louis<br />

Hartz have insisted. Rather, it was the tradition of republicanism that<br />

informed the American Revolution and the early vision of the kind of<br />

democracy and society that it would usher in. In this sense, American<br />

democracy was initially concerned with the preservation of the public good<br />

through political institutions that were publicly accountable; it was not selfinterest<br />

and the accumulation of private property that initially informed<br />

broad sections of the American citizenry. But throughout American political<br />

history, there has been a real tension between this tradition of republicanism<br />

and its emphasis on the public good and Lockean liberalism that places<br />

emphasis on private property and a liberal political order insisting on the<br />

separation the political and economic spheres. Thinkers like William Graham<br />

Sumner in the 19th century and, more recently, Milton Friedman, have<br />

interpreted American democracy through the lens of individual liberty and,<br />

therefore, as economic and political liberalism, a position grounded in the<br />

individual and not in a conception of the public.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

Progressive alternatives to the tax cuts need to be articulated. A tax system<br />

that is as indecipherable and impenetrable as that in the United States<br />

requires serious reform. However, this does not mean eliminating tax<br />

revenues through tax cuts. Taxes on wealth would be much more effective<br />

than taxes on income since inequality has risen most in terms of wealth and<br />

not in terms of income. 15 In this way, the place where social inequality is<br />

most intense—in the unequal distribution of wealth—would be the place<br />

where redistribution would be concentrated. Wealth inequality between<br />

households means a disparity in the ability to buy a home, is more “likely to<br />

be better able to provide for its children’s educational and health needs, live<br />

in a neighborhood characterized by more amenities and lower levels of crime,<br />

have greater resources that can be called upon in times of economic hardship,<br />

and have more influence in political life.” 16<br />

But even more, the central problem—and one that would no doubt capture<br />

the attention of much of the electorate—would be to advocate job growth<br />

through government stimulus. What the Democrats in Washington should<br />

be pushing for in place of simply smaller tax cuts is an expansion in<br />

government programs that provide both public services and employment.<br />

Education, health care as well as transportation infrastructure are specific<br />

examples. Aside from being excellent opportunities for the state to create<br />

useful and dearly needed public services, they would also create well-paying<br />

jobs for large segments of the population. These are programs that have<br />

actually worked in the past and today require more serious attention in part<br />

because they are in stark opposition to the supply-side policies that the Bush<br />

administration has been pushing. Indeed, the empirical evidence for job<br />

growth resulting from increased consumer spending is extremely weak<br />

compared to that of state and federal programs. 17<br />

A responsible left program needs to counter the ideology that currently<br />

hampers economic policy and move toward policies that will capture the<br />

interests of working people and connect their concerns with broader public<br />

programs at the state and federal level. This has not happened for a variety of<br />

reasons, one of which can be located in the general ideological view of the<br />

contemporary left and its attitude toward the state. In many ways, this is a<br />

product of the 1960s and the New Left which was overtly hostile toward the<br />

state. From anarchist-inspired movements to the Arendtians and the<br />

emphasis on communitarianism over what was generally seen as the<br />

coerciveness of the state—all of which were quite respectable positions on the<br />

left in the 1960s—the New Left promulgated a general political view that<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

was in opposition to the state, not merely in practice, but in theory as well. 18<br />

The New Left’s attack on the state left liberal Democrats with few allies when<br />

conservatives took power in 1980 with their own anti-state agenda. The state<br />

programs of the Roosevelt and Johnson administrations seem utopian now in<br />

the present context and the left has itself to blame in part for the lack of<br />

political and ideological support for the state and it has no practical<br />

institutional alternatives to the neoconservative vision that is emerging as<br />

present reality.<br />

Even more, there was also—beginning in the early 1970s—an effort by big<br />

business to clamp down on labor unions and also begin a campaign of<br />

political activism themselves to help stem the tide of anti-business sentiment<br />

whipped up during the 1960s. This is where institutions such as the<br />

American Enterprise Institute, the Cato Institute and the Heritage<br />

Foundation got started and by the end of the decade, they had succeeded in<br />

electing a president with their own ideological perspective.<br />

As a result of these different political trends, the Bush tax cuts will be able to<br />

push further a liberalized economic order that at the same time promotes<br />

economic inequality and the concentration of power in the hands of the few<br />

at the expense of the many, whether it be through wealth, property, or media<br />

control. This agenda goes against the grain of much of Western political<br />

thought which constantly repeats the injunction against extreme inequalities<br />

in property and wealth. From Plato and Aristotle through Locke, Smith,<br />

Hegel, Tocqueville and Dewey, among so many others, gross social<br />

inequalities have been seen as a major threat to the common good and a<br />

democratic polity. More and more, the republican strain in American politics<br />

is being eroded and the move toward a democracy based on the foundation<br />

of private interest is being increasingly privileged. Such a reconfigured<br />

democracy will see the roll back of the institutions and policies that have<br />

helped those disadvantaged by the economy; it will increase economic<br />

inequalities as well as inequalities in quality of life; and, in the end, it will<br />

affect the way that political power is distributed in the United States. The<br />

Bush tax cuts are therefore more complex and even more dangerous than<br />

initially meets the eye, and it is the very structure of American democratic<br />

culture and governance that hangs in the balance.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

Notes<br />

1 Grover Norquist on NOW in conversation with Bill Moyers, transcript at:<br />

http://www.pbs.org/now/printable/transcript_norquist_print.html. It must<br />

be said that there is also a bit of hysteria mixed in with this rhetoric. Norquist<br />

again: “Guys with guns will show up if you don’t pay your taxes and take<br />

that money from you. And I think that we want in order to have a free<br />

society to have as little as possible done coercively.” (Ibid.)<br />

2 David Cay Johnston, “Very Richest’s Share of Income Grew Even Bigger,<br />

Data Show,” The New York Times, June 26, 2003.<br />

3 See Laura D’Andrea Tyson, “Tax Cuts for the Rich Are Even More Wrong<br />

Today,” Business Week Online at:<br />

http://www.businessweek.com/magazine/content/02_27/b3790053.htm.<br />

4 See Claudio Katz, Vincent Mahler and <strong>Michael</strong> Franz, “The Impact of<br />

Growth and Distribution in Capitalist Countries: A Cross National Study,”<br />

American Political Science Review, vol. 77, no. 4, 1983.<br />

5 Sven Steimo, “Why Tax Reform? Understanding Tax Reform in its Political<br />

and Economic Context,”<br />

http://stripe.colorado.edu/%7Esteinmo/reform.html.<br />

6 Grundrisse zu Vorlesungen über die Staatswirtschaft quoted in George E.<br />

McCarthy, Classical Horizons: The Origins of Sociology in Ancient Greece<br />

(Albany: SUNY Press, 2003).<br />

7 The Pursuit of Inequality, p. 3 (New York: Pantheon Books, 1981).<br />

8 “Socking It to the States,” p. 12 The Nation, June 9, 2003.<br />

9 See David Francis, “Bush Tax Cuts Widen US Income Gap,” The Christian<br />

Science Monitor and Common Dreams at:<br />

www.commondreams.org/headlines01/0523-02.htm.<br />

10 Of course, there really is no such thing as a truly free market since there is<br />

always some form of corporate welfare or tariffs that benefit corporations.<br />

The key issue that should be emphasized is that any regulation that<br />

potentially helps working people is attacked whereas those regulatory bodies<br />

and policies that help capital are promoted or maintained.<br />

11 “There’s A Lot to Like About Bush’s Tax Plan,” p. 28, Business Week,<br />

February 24, 2003.<br />

12 See Mark Baldassare, “How the West Is Taxed,” Op-Ed Section The New<br />

York Times, June 27, 2003.<br />

13 See William Julius Wilson, The Bridge Over the Racial Divide: Rising<br />

Inequality and Coalition Politics (Berkeley: University of California Press,<br />

1999).<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong><br />

14 For an excellent statement of this position, see Karen Orren, Belated<br />

Feudalism (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1991).<br />

15 See Edward N. Wolff, Top Heavy: The Increasing Inequality of Wealth in<br />

America and What Can Be Done About It (New York: The New Press, 2002).<br />

16 Edward N. Wolff, “Racial Wealth Disparities,” p. 7 Jerome Levy Institute of<br />

Economics Public Policy Brief, no. 66, 2001.<br />

17 See Jeff Madrick “Economic Scene,” The New York Times, July 10, 2003.<br />

18 Sadly, this is still a thriving view among leftist thinkers. See the recent<br />

“Rosa Luxemburg Debate” concerning the state in New Politics, vol. VIII,<br />

2002 no. 4; vol. IX, 2002, no. 1 and no. 2.<br />

<strong>Michael</strong> J. <strong>Thompson</strong> is the founder and editor of <strong>Logos</strong> and teaches Political<br />

Science at Hunter College, CUNY. His new book, Islam and the West: Critical<br />

Perspectives on Modernity, has just been released from Rowman and Littlefield<br />

Press.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


L<br />

<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

American Landscape: Lies, Fears, and the<br />

Distortion of Democracy<br />

by<br />

<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

ying has always been part of politics. Traditionally, however, the lie was<br />

seen as a necessary evil that those in power should keep from their<br />

subjects. Even totalitarians tried to hide the brutal truths on which their<br />

regimes rested. This disparity gave critics and reformers their sense of<br />

purpose: to illuminate for citizens the difference between the way the world<br />

appeared and the way it actually functioned. In the aftermath of the Iraqi<br />

War, however, that sense of purpose has become imperiled along with the<br />

trust necessary for maintaining a democratic discourse. The Bush<br />

administration has boldly proclaimed the legitimacy of the lie, the irrelevance<br />

of trust, while the mainstream media has essentially looked the other way.<br />

Not since the days of Senator Joseph McCarthy has such purposeful<br />

misrepresentation, such blatant lying, permeated the political culture of the<br />

United States. It has now become clear to all except the most stubborn that<br />

the justification for war against Iraq was not simply based on “mistaken”<br />

interpretations, or “false data,” but on sheer mendacity. Current discussions<br />

among politicians and investigators focus almost exclusively on the false<br />

assertion made in sixteen words of a presidential speech that Saddam sought<br />

to buy uranium for his weapons of mass destruction in Africa. The forest has<br />

already been lost for the trees. It has all become a matter of faulty intelligence<br />

by subordinates rather than purposeful lying by those in authority. CIA<br />

officials have, however, openly stated that they were pressured to make their<br />

research results support governmental policy. Secretary of State Colin Powell<br />

has still not substantiated claims concerning the existence of weapons of mass<br />

destruction that he made in his famous speech to the United Nations. Other<br />

important members of the Bush inner circle have openly admitted that that<br />

the threat posed by Iraq was grossly exaggerated even though emphasizing it<br />

served to build a consensus for war. They have nonchalantly verified what<br />

critics have always known: that American policy was propelled by thoughts of<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

an Iraqi nation “swimming in oil,” control over four rivers in an arid region,<br />

throwing the fear of the western God into Teheran and Damascus, and<br />

establishing an alternative military presence to what once existed in Saudi<br />

Arabia. The Bush administration has chastised none of them and criticisms<br />

by politicians stemming from the Democratic Party have been tempered to<br />

the point of insignificance. “Leaders” of the so-called opposition party<br />

obviously fear being branded disloyal.<br />

As they quake in their boots and wring their hands, however, issues<br />

concerning the broader justification of the war have disappeared entirely<br />

from the widely read right-wing tabloids like The New York Post and, at best,<br />

retreated to the middle pages of more credible newspapers. Enough elected<br />

politicians in both parties, scurrying for cover, now routinely make sure to<br />

note that their support for the war did not rest on the existence of weapons of<br />

mass destruction in Iraq. Rarely mentioned is that the lack of such weapons,<br />

combined with the inability to find proof of links between Saddam Hussein<br />

and Al Qaeda, invalidates the claim that Iraq actually posed a national<br />

security threat to the United States. Everyone in the political establishment<br />

now points to humanitarian motives. For the most part, however, such<br />

concerns were not upper-most in their minds then and there is little reason to<br />

believe that they believed them decisive for the public opinion of the<br />

American public: human rights indeed became championed by self-styled<br />

“realists” like Paul Wolfowitz and Henry Kissinger—whose reputations were<br />

previously based on denying them—only when claims concerning the<br />

imperiled national interests of the United States were revealed as vacuous.<br />

President Bush and members of his cabinet may now insist that the weapons<br />

will ultimately be found, with luck perhaps just before the next election, and<br />

the links to Al Qaeda will soon be unveiled. But this is already to admit that<br />

the evidence did not exist when the propaganda machine began to roll out its<br />

arguments for war. The administration had untold intellectual resources from<br />

which to learn that the United States would not be welcomed as the liberator<br />

of Iraq and that serious problems would plague the post-war reconstruction.<br />

But the administration wasn’t interested: it was content to forward its<br />

position and then find information to back it up. This indeed begs two<br />

obvious questions that are still hardly ever asked by the mainstream media:<br />

Would the American public have supported a war against Iraq under those<br />

circumstances and, perhaps more importantly, did this self-induced ignorance<br />

about conditions in Iraq help produce the current morass in which billions of<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

dollars have been wasted and, seemingly every day, another few young<br />

American soldiers are being injured or killed?<br />

Millions of dollars were wasted by a special prosecutor on investigating false<br />

allegations of financial impropriety by Bill and Hillary Clinton.<br />

Impeachment proceedings were begun following the revelations of an affair<br />

between the then president and an intern. The media was up in arms and its<br />

champions still pat themselves on the back for their role in bringing about<br />

the Watergate hearings. When it comes to the chorus of untruth perpetrated<br />

over Iraq, which brought a nation into war with the resulting loss of lives and<br />

resources, it seems the public interest is best served by “bi-partisan”<br />

committees and a submissive press. Just as the Republican Party has been<br />

flagrant in its refusal to rationally justify its war of “liberation,” which is<br />

leaving an increasingly sour taste in the mouths of occupiers and occupied<br />

alike, the centrist Democratic Leadership Council made famous by Bill<br />

Clinton is now warning the public that—with the recent surge in the polls of<br />

Governor Howard Dean—its party is on the verge of being taken over by a<br />

“far left” intent upon opposing tax cuts, introducing “costly” social programs,<br />

and criticizing the foreign policy of the Bush administration.<br />

Leading members of the DLC poignantly ask whether the Democrats wish<br />

“to vent or govern” and when questioned whether the current disarray in<br />

which the party finds itself was a product of Republican success or<br />

Democratic blunders, Senator Evan Bayh of Indiana, chairman of the<br />

organization, responded that it was a matter of “assisted suicide.” Forgotten<br />

was the election of November 2002 in which, by every serious account, it was<br />

the inability of the Democratic Party to offer any meaningful alternative to<br />

the policy of President Bush that led to the most disastrous non-presidential<br />

year losses in American history. It doesn’t seem to matter that the “bipartisan”<br />

candidates like Joseph Lieberman, who refuse to offer a coherent<br />

alternative on domestic and foreign policy issues, are not catching on with<br />

the American public. It also doesn’t seem to matter that the proposed tax cuts<br />

work against the interests of the party’s own constituency, that social welfare<br />

programs would cost a fraction of the billion dollars a month spent in Iraq,<br />

and that the current foreign policy is undermining respect for the United<br />

States throughout the world. Ignored is the way in which the Democratic<br />

Party—the party of FDR, Bobby Kennedy, and Paul Wellstone—has become<br />

a joke on the mid-night talk shows. And, all the while, the “liberal” media<br />

nods its head and counsels prudence. Senator Bayh has no clue: as it now<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

stands, the Democratic Party can neither “vent” nor “govern.” Democrats<br />

should worry about their image—especially since they don’t have one.<br />

The United States is ever more surely appearing less like a functioning<br />

democracy in which ideologically distinct parties and groups debate the issues<br />

of the day than a one-party state ruled by shifting administrative factions.<br />

Free speech exists, but to have a formal right and to make substantive use of<br />

it is a very different matter. Consensus and bi-partisanship are becoming<br />

increasingly paranoid preoccupations of the media whose range of debate is<br />

becoming narrowed to that between humpty and dumpty. Noam Chomsky<br />

may not be everyone’s taste, but his little collection of interviews 9-11 (New<br />

York: Seven Stories Press) was the best-selling work on that terrible event:<br />

when was the last time you saw him interviewed on mainstream media? It is<br />

the same with Barbara Ehrenreich, Frances Fox Piven, and any number of<br />

other radical or progressive public figures. Every now and then, of course,<br />

Cornel West may pop up for an interview on MSNBC, there are still a few<br />

critical editorialists like Paul Krugman in The New York Times and Robert<br />

Scheer in The Los Angeles Times, and Sean Penn can still pay for a full page<br />

advertisement to express his critical views on the war. Nevertheless, their<br />

voices are being drowned out by the right-wing pundits that dominate what<br />

conservatives—ever ready to view themselves as the victim of the system they<br />

control—castigate as the “liberal” media.<br />

The situation brings to mind the vision of a society dominated by what<br />

Herbert Marcuse once termed “repressive tolerance”: a world in which<br />

establishmentarians can point to the rare moment of radical criticism to<br />

better enjoy the reign of an overwhelming conformity. The evidence is<br />

everywhere: CNN is only a minor player when compared with the combined<br />

power of television news shows with huge audiences hosted by megacelebrities—still<br />

relatively unknown in Europe—like Rush Limbaugh, Bill<br />

O’Reilly, and Pat Robertson. Belief in the reactionary character of the<br />

American public has generated a self-fulfilling prophecy: the public gets the<br />

shows it wants that, in turn, only strengthen the original prejudices. Edward<br />

R. Murrow, so courageous in his resistance to the hysteria of the 1950s, may<br />

often be invoked by the “fourth estate,” but that invocation is merely<br />

symbolic.<br />

Hardly a word is said any longer about the skepticism of millions who<br />

participated in the mass demonstrations that rocked the United States or how<br />

the mainstream media criticism of Tony Blair has transformed the English<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

political landscape. One criterion for judging democracy is the plurality of<br />

views presented to the public. That is because the number of views expressed<br />

usually reflects the number of political choices from which the public can<br />

choose. It is striking to reflect upon the range of perspectives expressed<br />

during the era of Progressivism, the New Deal, and the 1960s. By the same<br />

token, however, the attempt to constrict civil liberties in moments of crisis<br />

has been a fundamental trend of American history. Thus, in the current<br />

context, it is chilling to consider the narrowing of debate over the legitimacy<br />

of a terrible war to sixteen words made in a presidential speech, an<br />

increasingly corrupt evaluation of policy options, and a growing inability of<br />

the American public to grasp the distrust its present government inspires<br />

elsewhere.<br />

A current Pew Poll of more than forty-four countries, directed by former<br />

Secretary of State Madeline Albright, shows that distrust of the United States<br />

has grown in an exceptionally dramatic fashion in each of them. This<br />

includes sensitive nations like Pakistan, Saudi Arabia, Turkey, and Indonesia<br />

where unfavorable ratings of the United States have gone from 36% in the<br />

summer of 2002 to 83% in May of 2003. The “streets” of Europe and, more<br />

importantly, the Arab world have been lost. Perhaps they will be regained at a<br />

future time. But the numbers in this poll express anger at a basic reality.<br />

With its new strategy of the “pre-emptive strike” buttressed by a $400 billion<br />

defense budget, bigger than that of the next eighteen nations put together,<br />

the United States has rendered illusory the idea of a “multi-polar world.” It<br />

has become the hegemon amid a world of subaltern states and it has no need<br />

to listen or debate. The difference between truth and falsehood no longer<br />

matter. There remains only the fact of victory, the fall of Saddam Hussein,<br />

and the bloated self-justifications attendant upon what Senator J. William<br />

Fulbright, the great critic of the Vietnam War, termed “the arrogance of<br />

power.”<br />

Americans have traditionally tended to rally around the president in times of<br />

war. But this war, according to the president, has no end in sight. A new<br />

department of “homeland security” is being contemplated and the civil<br />

liberties of citizens are imperiled. Justification is supplied by manipulative<br />

and self-serving “national security alerts” in which the designation of danger<br />

shifts from yellow to orange to red and then back again without the least<br />

evidence being presented regarding why a certain color was chosen and why<br />

it was changed. The bully pulpit of the president, as Theodore Roosevelt<br />

called it, can go a long way in defining the style of national discourse and a<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong><br />

sense of what is acceptable to its citizenry. This is where leadership asserts<br />

itself. Nevertheless, precisely on this question of leadership for which<br />

President Bush has received such lavish praise, he is weakest.<br />

Beyond all social policy concerns, or disagreements over any particular issue<br />

of foreign policy, this president is presiding over a newly emerging culture in<br />

which truth is subordinate to power, reason is the preserve of academics,<br />

paranoia is hyped, and know-nothing nationalism is celebrated. No longer is<br />

the constructive criticism of genuine democratic allies taken seriously: better<br />

to rely on a corrupt “coalition of the willing” whose regimes have been<br />

bribed, whose economies have been threatened, and whose soldiers have been<br />

exempt from fighting this unending war on terror. There is little critical selfreflection<br />

and not the hint of an apology for its conduct in the weeks before<br />

the war broke out. It is dangerous to underestimate the moral high ground<br />

that has been squandered since 9/11. The question for other nations is this:<br />

how to trust the liar whose arrogance is such that he finds it unnecessary to<br />

conceal the lie?<br />

Democracy remains elusive in Iraq, and Afghanistan is languishing in misery<br />

while the creation of new threats to the national security of the United States<br />

is being undertaken right now. Iran trembles. Syria, too. And there is always<br />

Cuba or North Korea. The enemy can change in the blink of an eye. The<br />

point about arbitrary power is, indeed, that it is arbitrary. What happens<br />

once the next lie is told and the next gamble is made? It is perhaps useful to<br />

think back to other powerful nations whose leaders liked to lie and loved to<br />

gamble—and who won and won and won again until finally they believed<br />

their own lies and gambled once too often.<br />

<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong> is Professor (II) of Political Science, German Studies and<br />

Comparative Literature at Rutgers University. A new edition of his book A<br />

Rumor About the Jews is forthcoming from Oxford University Press.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


T<br />

<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

Wither Independence?<br />

Iraq in Perspective: From Despotism to Occupation<br />

by<br />

<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

I<br />

here has been nearly unanimous consensus among Iraqis that a new age<br />

of possible progress and prosperity has dawned upon their battered and<br />

war-fatigued country with the downfall of Saddam Hussein on April 9 th .<br />

However, much had tainted this rosy image, and much more could still mar<br />

the outcome. A principal factor has been the highly incompetent and<br />

nonchalant manner in which the U.S.-U.K. occupying forces have conducted<br />

themselves: one wonders if this is a result of sheer imperial arrogance, or<br />

ignorance of the region, or a combination of both. None of the above reasons<br />

is excusable in any way, of course. When a disproportionate U.S. force<br />

decimated Saddam Hussein’s two infamous sons, Uday and Qusay, and their<br />

few companions and then showed their battered images to the world, two<br />

messages may be read therefrom. First, the U.S. will absolutely contravene<br />

every mode of rational, moral, ethical and reasonable behavior to make their<br />

point and achieve success (in their own assessment). Why did they not arrest<br />

these two criminals and have them justly tried in Iraqi courts? Second, U.S.<br />

policy planners have an inveterate attachment to change through force. The<br />

lessons from the 20 th century are aplenty (as the Hiroshima anniversary,<br />

amongst others, adequately reminds us), and the difference now is of volume<br />

and rate rather than quality.<br />

Those of us who vehemently opposed the launch of an immoral, unjust and<br />

illegal war have to seriously address now the occupation: not in a romantic,<br />

knee-jerk oppositional fashion—which has become commonplace among<br />

western as well as Arab oppositionists to U.S. imperialist plans—but in a<br />

calculated manner that puts the interests of the Iraqi people<br />

uncompromisingly at the forefront. Thus, what are the facts on the ground,<br />

and what may be done? In what follows, I am more interested in raising<br />

questions than providing simple, speculative answers. What deeply angers<br />

and pains me are the cold as well as condescending views offered by Arabs or<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

Americans, alike, when it comes to dealing with Iraq. To these two groups,<br />

governments and populace, Iraq seems to be a possession, and each has an<br />

opinion on what to do with it. Very little attention is given to the how to<br />

achieve results, which leads me, and a few others, to believe that none is really<br />

interested in the well-being of Iraqis.<br />

II<br />

The U.S. has waged the war against Iraq in spite of unprecedented<br />

worldwide public pressure against it. The pretexts for the war, Saddam<br />

Hussein’s possession of Weapons of Mass Destruction (WMD) and his<br />

alleged link to al-Qaeda, have been in dispute from the very beginning. Four<br />

months after the war and neither a trace of WMD exists, nor a hint of a link<br />

to al-Qaeda terrorists, rather an unraveling of a series of apocryphal stories<br />

penned by elected and unelected officials in the U.S. and U.K. governments<br />

with the sole purpose of manipulating public opinion prior to waging war.<br />

Now the sad fact is that such despicable tactics—and the list could be long—<br />

have placed the fallen despot, Saddam Hussein, and his regime in a rather<br />

romantic-heroic position among many a person within the Arab world, the<br />

third world and elsewhere. Rather than containing terrorist groups and<br />

cutting their lifelines, U.S. actions have given life to a litany of fragmented,<br />

but ruthless, reactionary groups intent on inflicting damage on all symbols of<br />

modernity—and certainly not limited to the U.S. and its interests.<br />

To this day, many cannot fathom the horrific and criminal nature of the<br />

deposed Iraqi regime; and U.S. tactics in Iraq have allowed people to<br />

compare to and contrast with a fictitious version of Saddam Hussein’s reign.<br />

Every visitor to Iraq speaks of war-torn cities, devastation, dilapidated services<br />

and war- and sanctions-fatigued populace, on the one hand, and the existence<br />

of monstrous, grand palaces and edifices, on the other: All being the direct<br />

outcome of 30+ years of authoritarian rule and 12 years of the most<br />

suffocating (U.S.-U.K. instigated and propelled) economic sanctions ever<br />

imposed. But Iraqis returning for the first time after decades of exile have<br />

observed one thing of significant importance in the midst of the rubble:<br />

people feel free and hopeful. There is a satisfying, inner happiness one feels<br />

when free that can only be understood if one’s freedom has been curtailed: no<br />

explanation, lengthy or terse, would do justice. This is what precisely gives<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

one hope for a better tomorrow. Alas, both are slowly being nibbled at, and<br />

the prospects are unclear.<br />

Four months after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s hierarchical structure of<br />

governance, basic municipal and civic services are at an appallingly low level.<br />

The work force has no work and only portion of it has started receiving<br />

salaries, some of which were given in useless currency that further aggravated<br />

an already drained populace. 1 Security is deteriorating mainly in Baghdad and<br />

environs, while most other cities function much better. Further, the rumor<br />

mill is grinding absolutely anything imaginable, which only contributes to<br />

increasing the level of uncertainty in the country. The Coalition Provisional<br />

Authority (CPA) promulgated actions that could only worsen a very<br />

unsettled situation, namely: dissolving the Army and affiliated organizations,<br />

as well as the Ministry of Information, thus rendering more than 250,000<br />

without recourse to any source of livelihood. Furthermore, the so-called<br />

process of de-Baathification is purely ideological in nature—principally<br />

fueled by the hawks in the U.S. Administration and their Iraqi underlings,<br />

most notably Ahmed Chalabi, Kanan Makiya and Co.<br />

In a country where membership to the Baath party became the only means<br />

for advancement for many, this tactic is bound to engulf the country in a<br />

process of vilification and counter-vilification based on personal, rather than<br />

objective, accounts. What would be more a appropriate and just recourse is<br />

to judiciously investigate the role of senior Baath functionaries: trying before<br />

the law all those guilty of crimes against the people, and pardoning those<br />

whose hands were untainted. A national heeling and reconciliation process is<br />

essential if the tragedies and horrors of the past 30 years are to be<br />

constructively addressed, and avoid institutionalizing recrimination and guilt<br />

by association. The latter is likely to take the country down a dangerous<br />

spiral, which accentuates antiquated tribal rule—that Saddam Hussein<br />

himself tried to resuscitate in the latter part of the nineties to further buttress<br />

his reign. Iraq’s political parties must resist this and instead press for just trials<br />

and a process of reconciliation. Interestingly, the majority of Iraqis seems to<br />

favor this approach as evinced by personal and televised accounts (albeit not<br />

polled scientifically), thus presenting yet another hopeful scenario for Iraq<br />

and its people if left alone.<br />

Events indicate that the U.S. invading-cum-occupying forces, while<br />

possessing formidable fire power, have seemingly less than formidable<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

planning and analytical powers. Most echelons of the decision-making<br />

process within the U.S. government had apparently been surprised by the run<br />

of events. More surprisingly, no contingency plans had been prepared for the<br />

(speedy) fall of Saddam Hussein’s government and the ensuing dissolution of<br />

ministries, state organizations, the police, etc. What would a rational person<br />

expect would happen if a highly centralized structure of governance<br />

dependent on a ruthless social policy grounded in chauvinistic and sectarian<br />

politics suddenly collapsed? Why, then, have U.S. planners and their research<br />

centers and institutes been unable to anticipate at least a general framework<br />

for dealing with events?<br />

The sanctions-fatigued, repressed Iraqis with hardly adequate access to basic<br />

food requirements, never mind super-dooper search engines, computing<br />

power, etc., could—and would—have done much better than the<br />

functionaries of the CPA. It is also worthy of note that this just-do-and-waitto-see-what-happens<br />

is essentially the same obscurantism governing<br />

doctrinaire religious teachings (of whatever color): a complete and utter<br />

absence of critical thought. This behavior fundamentally stems from what the<br />

U.S. feels itself to be: the unparalleled imperial power of our age. Thus,<br />

ideology is fundamentally and intrinsically at the core of all that is<br />

happening, and the media have performed a compelling job of disinforming<br />

the U.S. populace and effectively contributing to a brainwashing campaign at<br />

an astounding rate. A pressing question presents itself: Will the U.S. populace<br />

seek to change this through ballot boxes in 2004? Will they come to really<br />

understand that they would not be hated in the world if they actually<br />

thought of the rest of the world on an equal footing and genuinely divorced<br />

themselves from condescending attitudes that are so prevalent in almost every<br />

segment of class, profession, ethnic and religious background?<br />

III<br />

IRAQ IS BEING CONSTANTLY PORTRAYED AS A FRAGILE formation of ethnoreligious<br />

groups, essentially violent and vying for power. Is there a country on<br />

this planet that is not an amalgamation of ethno-religious groups? Even Israel<br />

as a Jewish State comprises various ethnicities, and hence is heterogeneous.<br />

Modern Iraq has been a staunchly secular country where the separation of<br />

religion from the state has been a fact of life—respected and adopted by all,<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

and certainly by its Shiite and Sunni religious establishments. While not a<br />

phenomenon at the popular level, ethno-sectarian chauvinism has been<br />

institutionalized by the state since its inception: the progeny of the British<br />

concocted Cox-al-Naqeeb plan laying down the foundation for the pyramidal<br />

power structure in the nascent government of Iraq in 1921. To ensure<br />

reliance on foreign forces, state power was entrusted to a minority elite, with<br />

a clear segregation of the largesse among the vying groups: Officers of the<br />

erstwhile Ottoman Army, Sunni landowners and religious notables, and a<br />

handful of Shiite landowners and religious notables and Jewish and Christian<br />

businessmen. 2 The association was entrenched in the belonging to a group,<br />

ethnic, religious or sectarian, rather than to the country Iraq. It may be moot<br />

to question whether that was not a reflection of the lack of a national<br />

identity; however, history indicates that the inhabitants of Iraq had strongly<br />

identified themselves with the land of Mesopotamia, and their association has<br />

since been with it rather than strictly speaking the tribe, or religion or sect.<br />

1958, marking the overthrow of the monarchy and the establishment of the<br />

first republic, ushered in a new period where Iraqis identified themselves as<br />

citizens and not according to tribal, religious or sectarian divides. The<br />

modern political formations, Communist or Pan-Arab—principally the<br />

Baath party, have been clearly secular and encompassed all sectors of society<br />

along ideological rather than ethno-sectarian divisions. The Baath party<br />

slowly degenerated since Saddam Hussein became the “strong man” in the<br />

early seventies, and in the summer of 1979 he consummated his power by<br />

annihilating the leftist wing within the party (led by Abdel Khaleq al-<br />

Samarai, who was summarily purged with more than 50 of his comrades,<br />

most of whom were executed by Saddam and his underlings). During the<br />

1980s Saddam Hussein embarked on entrenching a family-based rule, and<br />

the remnants of the party had become a façade to one of the darkest periods<br />

of Iraq’s history. In the 1990s, with the help of the sanctions, the government<br />

had further degenerated into a brutal mafia-style repression against any<br />

modicum of opposition. The inhabitants of the south, mostly Shias, paid a<br />

particularly heavy price as a result of their uprising following the 1991 Gulf<br />

War. Prior to 1991 the government had forcibly transferred Arabs from the<br />

south to the Kurdish north, especially oil-rich Kirkuk, with the objective of<br />

creating a new demographic reality. Moreover, a diligent student of the<br />

British colonizers, Saddam Hussein fervently adopted an approach favoring<br />

one or other Sunni clan for wealth and governmental positions, and<br />

continually pitted one tribe against the other. This ipso facto created a<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

situation whereby those minority tribes had come to associate their<br />

comfortable status with the regime’s existence.<br />

The inhabitants of the south, on the other hand, have long been suppressed<br />

not because of their Shia faith per se, but because that region had always been<br />

a source of resistance against central authority. The south of Iraq, one of the<br />

richest cultural hot spots anywhere, has long been characteristically secular<br />

and had been the birthplace of Iraqi communism as well as the Arab socialist<br />

movement—including the Baath party. Hence, the brutal repression and<br />

suppression inflicted on the inhabitants of the south by Saddam Hussein’s<br />

regime simply began as a measure against a people demanding freedom, then<br />

metamorphosed into a sectarian identity following the disappearance of all<br />

secular opposition within Iraq. Saddam Hussein’s well-practiced technique of<br />

punishment had been collective and decisively long term: cut off the<br />

livelihood of any group of people who dares pose a threat to his rule. Thus,<br />

the Marsh Arabs, descendants of Mesopotamia’s first dwellers, have been<br />

dealt a most severe blow to their very livelihood and existence for demanding<br />

“bread and freedom”: the marshes were drained, and fertile agricultural land<br />

was turned arid because the Tigris had purposefully been redirected away<br />

from it.<br />

It is worthwhile pointing out that while the south had been brutally<br />

suppressed, not-an-insignificant number of the security apparatus torturers<br />

did actually come from the south too—with the top security echelons coming<br />

from the family mafia and affiliated subordinates. Such is the nexus of victim<br />

and torturer under Saddam Hussein’s reign of terror: entwined to the nth<br />

degree.<br />

IV<br />

Why, then, do Arab satellite TV stations and most Arab journals<br />

maliciously propagate an image of every event in Iraq taking place along<br />

sectarian lines? Al-Jazeera, in spite of clarifications and corrections from Iraqis<br />

inside Iraq, insists on calling the pockets of local fighting as “national<br />

resistance led by the Sunnis.” In many a program where audience from<br />

Baghdad, Cairo and Beirut talk about the situation in Iraq, you here one<br />

rhetorical statement after another from Cairo and Beirut devoid of genuine<br />

sympathy for the plight of the Iraqis and any concrete plan of how the Arabs<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

wish to assist the Iraqis: Thus the strong backlash within a significant portion<br />

of Iraqis, educated or otherwise all across the country, against the manner in<br />

which Arab governments, press, intellectuals and even populace had sought<br />

to represent the situation in Iraq under Saddam Hussein’s rule and now.<br />

Iraqis feel disgusted by the hypocrisy practiced by many an Arab: prior to 9<br />

April, 2003 Iraq’s children were a mere slogan for Arabs as the murderous<br />

sanctions torn them asunder, and as years of political repression sought, but<br />

failed, to create a docile populace. Most Iraqis contend that no progress could<br />

emerge in the Arab world if internal repression persists, and no justification<br />

should be given to any form of authoritarian rule, as the history of modern<br />

Iraq has amply shown: a rich nation, and highly-educated people literally<br />

reduced to selling their belongings to rummage for food for their offspring. 3<br />

Iraq may now present a scenario for the Arabs to follow. No one in Iraq is<br />

oblivious to U.S. reasons for waging war on Iraq, but they recognized their<br />

inability to stand against the U.S. mammoth—since neither Europe nor any<br />

other state dared oppose the U.S.. The split between the dormant left inside<br />

of Iraq and their comrades outside specifically addresses this point. They<br />

both agreed that no positive change could take place in Iraq while Saddam<br />

Hussein’s regime was in power, but they differed on the mechanisms for<br />

change. Those who lived inside Iraq and were experiencing repression on a<br />

daily basis felt that only an outside power could remove the despotic regime.<br />

Then, and only then, could work begin to rebuild the country. Hardly any<br />

Iraqi welcomed the invading forces, and they all agree that the occupying<br />

forces must leave. The collapse of the central government and all its offshoots<br />

created a significant power vacuum as well as a security black hole. At the<br />

current stage, foreign presence is required to maintain peace and order. The<br />

question is how and who should do it? No army in the world is trained to<br />

maintain peace and order among civilians, thus the tragic chaotic scenarios<br />

over the past four months. All visitors to Iraq acknowledge that the young<br />

American GIs are scared witless, and therefore shoot at everything that<br />

moves. This takes us back to questions I posed at the beginning of this<br />

article: Are the U.S. planners incompetent, nonchalant or both?<br />

What is clear is that a strict timeline for a speedy withdrawal of U.S. and<br />

British forces must be put in place, and at the same time a staunch<br />

commitment must be made by the UN for international forces to replace<br />

them at once. There should be no lapse between the two as the political<br />

volatility in Iraq now is serious. Moreover, the Governing Council appointed<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

by Paul Bremer III, while not the transitory national government that was<br />

demanded by the Iraqis, is required to form a united front and work to<br />

immediately achieve two goals: restoring peace and security within the<br />

country, and restoring the functioning of municipal and governmental<br />

activities. Their efficacy will be judged if they achieve these two goals and<br />

how quickly. Once this is accomplished, an unequivocal demand for the<br />

institution of democratic elections to form a new government must be put in<br />

place through a realistic, but non-pliant timeline. Achieving success would<br />

require a unified approach by the Council in order to pressure the CPA into<br />

accepting Iraqi demands.<br />

The support that the world could give Iraqis is by placing pressure on their<br />

respective governments to demand that Iraqis receive the reigns of power,<br />

peacefully, systemically and quickly. The world has a chance to show that it<br />

cannot let the U.S. greyhound loose: it must be tamed.<br />

Notes<br />

1<br />

The 10,000 Dinar note is rumoured to be counterfeit and is thus being<br />

accepted at a much lower rate, if at all. Furthermore, prices continue to soar.<br />

2<br />

The religious establishment, as elsewhere, was split between submissive and<br />

oppositional.<br />

3<br />

The Arab League in the meeting held in early August by its foreign<br />

ministers refused to recognize the Governing Council recently formed in<br />

Iraq, and rationalized the decision on the basis that recognition would be<br />

tantamount to accepting occupation. According to the charter of the League,<br />

UN Security Council resolutions must be accepted and adhered to as well as<br />

international treaties. The UN passed Security Council resolution 1483,<br />

under U.S. pressure, that basically legitimized the occupation of Iraq and<br />

placed the country under the administrative control of the occupying forces.<br />

U.S. forces occupy parts of almost every Arab state, kingdom or sheikhdom<br />

with the exception of a few, and hence the Arab foreign ministers’ talk of not<br />

willing to recognize occupation by the U.S. is nothing but hogwash.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


<strong>Wadood</strong> <strong>Hamad</strong><br />

Moreover, they are in contravention of the very UNSC resolutions that they<br />

proclaim to enforce. The real motive for their action lies elsewhere. A<br />

genuine change towards democracy in Iraq would threaten all of these<br />

illegitimate governments, and thus they have been united in actively<br />

opposing any reasonable resolution to the Iraq crisis. They have not even<br />

proposed any alternative to U.S. occupation, nor outlined a “road map” for<br />

ending occupation. Moreover, Arab official media continue to portray any<br />

escalation in Iraq on religious, sectarian and ethnic bases, and hardly any<br />

voice is given to the secular voices that are widely available inside the country.<br />

It is worthy of note that the clashes and confrontations with U.S. forces in<br />

regions surrounding Baghdad, notably Faluja, have been partly fuelled by<br />

religious fundamentalists, shipped to Iraq before and after the invasion of<br />

Iraq, bent on destabilizing the country. These deadly confrontations are not<br />

supported by most Iraqis and do not represent a form of armed struggle: they<br />

are futile violence whose goal is disruption of ordinary life and serves no<br />

useful goal: only innocent civilians die as a consequence.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


N<br />

Richard A. Couto<br />

The Incidental Liberation of Iraq<br />

by<br />

Richard A. Couto<br />

o one in Iraq or the U.S. believes that the primary intention of U.S.<br />

military action in Iraq was liberation. Yet, citizens of both nations need<br />

to unite to make it happen—Iraqis as an opportunity to avoid neocolonization<br />

and achieve some form of just and democratic self-rule and the<br />

U.S. as reparations for a misguided and dangerous preemptive invasion that<br />

is likely to exacerbate Middle East violence and instability. The U.S. Left<br />

cannot afford to gloat at the blunders of the Bush administration or hope for<br />

its failure. The stakes are far too high. The Left has to call upon those<br />

Democrats who can summon the courage to chart a new path to liberation,<br />

to face up to the deceptions that have brought us to this place, and to avoid<br />

the continuing deceptions about reconstruction.<br />

Almost universally, anyone in Baghdad will give you three reasons for the<br />

U.S. invasion: Israeli security; control of Iraqi oil; and weakening the Arab<br />

world. They appear as three faces of the underlying premise of U.S. policy<br />

towards Israeli security—no two Arab nations should equal Israel in military<br />

capacity. Iraq, with its oil wealth, had built one of the world’s largest armies,<br />

had the funds to support others, and Saddam, after 1991, could no longer be<br />

trusted to stay in line with US policy towards Israel.<br />

People in the U.S., thanks to the state-supporting media, are far more<br />

divided in opinion about the reasons for the US attack on Iraq. Among a list<br />

of rationale de jour’s, we find: Iraq posed an imminent threat from weapons<br />

of mass destruction: Iraq would be an eventual nuclear threat; Saddam had<br />

ties to Al-Qaeda.<br />

As the U.S. administration’s rationales fade from credibility, into a place<br />

between “technically correct” (Rumsfeld) and not “totally outrageous”<br />

(Powell), three conclusions are clear.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Richard A. Couto<br />

• Iraqi perceptions of U.S. intentions forge a more convincing logic<br />

that connects 9/11 to our invasion and occupation of Iraq. They<br />

coincide with the Defense Department’s neo-conservatives’ position<br />

to drain the swamp that breeds terrorism. This logic proceeds from<br />

the premise that Islamic terrorism has its base in the<br />

Israeli/Palestinian conflict. Control of Iraq oil cuts off supplies to<br />

Palestinian organizations and makes it easier to impose a U.S./Israeli<br />

peace.<br />

• There is almost universal sentiment that it is good that Saddam<br />

Hussein is gone. Dividing that sentiment are reservations about the<br />

illegal and unjustified means to that end; concerns with the U.S.<br />

intentions to impose its own regime on Iraq; and worries that the<br />

U.S. Office of Coalitional Provisional Authority [OCPA] does not<br />

have the competence or will to restore basic services—electricity and<br />

water and police protection;<br />

• and the liberation of Iraq, originally incidental to our purpose, has<br />

taken on immense importance to end the U.S. march towards endless<br />

preemptive war and to prevent an accidental empire whose chief<br />

exports are “death and violence” as the solemn ending of Woodward’s<br />

book, Bush at War, envisions. Far from draining the swamp of<br />

terrorism, these outcomes will fill and expand it.<br />

If Iraq is to reach liberation, three impediments, rooted in OCPA’s<br />

performance up to present, will have to be removed. First, some degree of<br />

normal service and security needs to be restored just to demonstrate OCPA’s<br />

competence. Second, OCPA will have the join the rest of us in a world that is<br />

gray-hued and not starkly black and white. Third, OCPA will have to end<br />

the U.S. hubris that it can liberate Iraq without the aid of the UN and its<br />

member states who failed their responsibility.<br />

Competence<br />

People compare OCPA’s performance unfavorably with Saddam’s regime’s in<br />

1991 when electrical power was restored within a month of the end of the<br />

war and despite much more damage. At best, eight hours of electrical power<br />

are available per day, rotated through the city in 2 hour blocks. This provides<br />

inadequate power for cooling Baghdad’s 115 o and for pumping clean water.<br />

Similarly, people compare the fear they had of Saddam’s secret police and the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Richard A. Couto<br />

diffuse fear they have now. Everyone has a story of a family member or<br />

neighbor robbed in their home or assaulted in the street. Women face threats<br />

from carjacking and sexual assault never known before. In the matters of<br />

safety and public services, the general assessment is that things are far worse<br />

than ever before. In effect, OCPA has turned all of Baghdad into a U.S. inner<br />

city with the variant of occupation military forces who do not speak the<br />

residents’ language.<br />

Waleed Shamil, professor of theatre arts at the University of Baghdad, makes<br />

the point even as he qualifies the severity of these problems. He thinks back<br />

to his eight years of study and teaching and assesses Baghdad’s problems as<br />

no worse than the worst neighborhoods of LA at that time.<br />

Imagine any U.S. inner-city with limited electrical power and interruptions<br />

of clean water supply; lack of refrigeration; ice available on the black market<br />

at high costs in money and time; limited public transportation; the burned<br />

out skeletons of cars, trucks, and military vehicles everywhere; crumbling<br />

infrastructure everywhere; debris in the streets; thick black smoke in the air<br />

coming from fires to dispose of debris; no relief from searing heat until the<br />

rains of September; 70 percent unemployment; interrupted income from<br />

police, civil service, and military jobs eliminated by OCPA decree; no<br />

telephone service; no postal service; and an unprecedented crime wave, then<br />

you can understand that it is the patience of the people Baghdad, a city of<br />

five million people, and their hope for better times that provide the primary<br />

security of U.S. troops. People offered different time lines for the endurance<br />

of this store of patience and hope but all acknowledged that the time for<br />

OCPA to demonstrate its competence was limited.<br />

A World of Black and White<br />

OCPA is impeded in its effort to restore public services, in part, by the U.S.<br />

preference for a policy based on the theology of good and evil and its<br />

obsession with the latter. Continuing resistance in Iraq and the attacks upon<br />

occupation forces, L. Paul Bremer III, OCPA head, and Secretary of Defense<br />

Donald Rumsfeld attribute to hardcore Sunni and Ba’athist loyalists, al-<br />

Qaeda, Iranians, and thugs; always some external enemy to U.S. virtue and<br />

“success.”<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Richard A. Couto<br />

Students and faculty at the University of Baghdad with whom we spoke are<br />

adamant that the resistance in Falluja and other places is cultural not<br />

political. Men, who are arrested in a public and humiliating manner—face<br />

down on the ground with a display of deadly force and then having their<br />

hands tied behind their backs—have relatives who feel compelled to avenge<br />

the family or tribe dishonored by their treatment. Crackdowns, with more<br />

arrests, detentions, and injury to and death of innocent residents, increase the<br />

pool of resentment from which resistance emerges. Similarly, the shooting of<br />

a U.S. soldier at the University of Baghdad could be more cultural, dealing<br />

with the insufficiently respectful treatment of female students, than political<br />

in nature as Bremer suggested. As one dean summarized, “We are tired of<br />

waiting for respect for ourselves and our nation.”<br />

There are many causes of the lack of basic services and the continued<br />

resistance, some of them of our own making. To externalize the causes of<br />

these problems into people we demonize not only overlooks our part in the<br />

problem it delays our getting on with more appropriate solutions.<br />

Hubris<br />

THIS U.S. THEOLOGICAL ANALYSIS IS THE CAUSE and effect of a hubris that is<br />

the third and perhaps the most serious impediment to OCPA’s work. Having<br />

sidestepped and bullied the UN in its build up to the war and having<br />

discredited its inspection program as too slow and ineffective, the U.S. now<br />

seems reluctant to admit its need for the UN in its reconstruction effort.<br />

Indeed, the cup-is-half-full message from Bremer and the Pentagon, for<br />

whom he works, calls for satisfaction and pride in what has been done,<br />

patience with the remaining tasks, and understanding of the complexities of<br />

the work before OCPA. These, of course, are the sorts of attitudes that the<br />

U.S. would not tolerate as it picked its fight with Iraq.<br />

OCPA continues to use a dual standard in its work. The University of<br />

Baghdad presents one small case of this impediment. Because of one of<br />

Bremer’s most serious errors, blanket de-Ba’athification. Sami Al-Mudaffar,<br />

the newly elected president of the University of Baghdad, faces the problem<br />

of dealing with Iraq’s premier University’s future without some of the<br />

administrators who ran things in the past.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Richard A. Couto<br />

Students, faculty, and other administrators distinguish “Saddamis’ from other<br />

Ba’athists. Saddamis believed in the party in their souls. They informed on<br />

students and faculty, put pressure on them to join the party, and withheld<br />

travel money, promotions, salary increases, and even teaching assignments<br />

unless they did. Some, it is claimed, even had students picked up, detained,<br />

tortured, and in some instances killed. The nominal Ba’athist, on the other<br />

hand, joined the party in outward appearances only so as not to impede their<br />

careers. They often covered for other colleagues’ dissent by lying about<br />

matters such as undergoing military training with their students as<br />

prescribed. Even these distinctions are not hard and fast but represent the<br />

foci of the elliptical orbits of evasion and repression within which faculty and<br />

students moved.<br />

They are very interested to see that those officials guilty of serious crimes<br />

against others receive lawful punishment. They are just as interested to see<br />

those outstanding teachers with only nominal Ba’athist credentials be<br />

retained to contribute to the teaching and scholarship of the University.<br />

Judging individuals by the characteristics of a group is a gross violation of<br />

human rights insists one de-Ba’athified faculty member.<br />

The hubris of de-Ba’athification stands out if applied to Bremer; hubris<br />

always employs a double-standard. How could the managing partner of<br />

Kissinger Associates be sufficiently “de-Kissingerized” to escape the taint of<br />

realpolitik without a hint of human values including the support of state<br />

terror in Chile and Indonesia? In a particularly relevant policy, Kissinger<br />

supported the Iranian Shah’s wish of support of the Kurds in their fight<br />

against Iraq in the 1970s as part of the grand strategy of the Cold War—Iran<br />

with the U.S., Saddam with the Soviets. The policy of the-enemy-of-myenemy-is-my-friend<br />

ended when the Shah decided that he would be friends<br />

with Iraq. Kissinger stopped aid to the Kurds and exposed them to retaliation<br />

by Iraq. In a statement that helps explain why some regard the Nobel Peace<br />

prize winner as an international war criminal, he explained famously that<br />

“Covert action should not be confused with missionary work.” Similarly,<br />

Bremer’s record of anti-terror study with the Heritage Foundation and focus<br />

on Iran suggests that “anti-terrorism should not be confused with national<br />

reconstruction.”<br />

The stakes are tremendous. Iraq, a nation of 24 million people, in 1980 was<br />

on the threshold of first world development. After three wars and 12 years of<br />

sanctions, Baghdad now longs for the standards of a third world country.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Richard A. Couto<br />

U.S. occupation has brought the lowest standard of living that Iraqis have<br />

known. There is fear that the U.S. will, intentionally or not, diminish Iraq<br />

further to the level of Afghanistan.<br />

It is not enough for the U.S. Left to observe all this in hopes of a Bush<br />

failure. First of all, the humanitarian crisis that we largely avoided in the war<br />

could follow from water borne diseases, food shortages, and violence.<br />

Secondly, Iraqis will not permit the U.S. to fail its incidental liberation of<br />

Iraq and play out some Kissingeresque geopolitical strategy with its citizens,<br />

nation, and institutions. Full-scale armed resistance to occupation without<br />

liberation will occur and the U.S. will face suppressing the resistance and<br />

maintaining an occupation of Iraq similar to the Israeli policies in its<br />

occupied territories. This will benefit no one and undermine the security of<br />

Israel and the U.S. The U.S. is unlikely to choose to abandon its intentions<br />

of achieving Israel security through control of Iraqi oil revenues, no matter<br />

how ill-conceived the means or ill-gotten the goods. As Jefferson said of<br />

slavery, we have a wolf by the ears. We may not want to hold it but we know<br />

there is danger in letting it go.<br />

An Iraqi policy for the Left would include dealing directly with the<br />

impediments to success. Such a policy would:<br />

• Insist on immediate visible signs of good intentions and competence<br />

which means<br />

o immediate tangible signs of progress on the resumption of<br />

electrical service throughout the country but especially urban<br />

areas;<br />

� accountability of the large U.S. contractors with<br />

responsibility for reconstruction and demand<br />

immediate efforts with visible results and assurance<br />

that profits and favoritism are not holding up<br />

immediate action in this emergency situation; and<br />

o re-establish the Iraqi military and police as quickly as possible<br />

and give them the tasks for security.<br />

• Bring new focus on Israeli security and<br />

o distinguish between Zionism and Israeli security and explain<br />

that the first is antithetical to the second;<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Richard A. Couto<br />

o acknowledge and end forty years of supporting the Israeli<br />

policy of military strength greater than any two Arab nations;<br />

and<br />

o acknowledge that the peace in the Middle East runs through<br />

Baghdad but has a different starting point than the one we<br />

have taken.<br />

� U.S. policies in Iraq should model new policies<br />

toward the Arab world rather than replicate<br />

Israeli/Palestinian relationships. This requires<br />

• a repudiation of past policies that used<br />

corruption, civil war, war between states, and<br />

coups to weak Arab states hostile to Israel and<br />

to maintain control of the region’s oil.<br />

• Establish democratic processes of governance and due process of<br />

punishment by<br />

o Turning over to the UN the task of establishing a national<br />

government in a truly democratic process that goes beyond<br />

giving Iraqis choices among U.S. preferences or manipulation<br />

of a new government to achieve the covert purposes of the<br />

U.S. invasion of Iraq;<br />

� This may mean establishing a government that may<br />

provide for Israel’s security in a manner different from<br />

U.S. and Israel’s preferences—nuclear disarmament,<br />

inspections for weapons of mass destruction, etc.<br />

o preclude from government and public office only those<br />

former officials duly tried and found guilty of crimes against<br />

Iraqi law or humanity.<br />

• End the sequential obsession with surrogates for elusive terrorists by<br />

o disconnecting Iraq from the war on terror and force our<br />

national leaders to admit that they manipulated the nation<br />

into fear for its security as a means to pursue other unstated<br />

policies;<br />

o ending the obsession with a purge of Ba’athist and other<br />

symbols of Saddam; and<br />

o describing U.S. efforts as war reparations;<br />

� acknowledge the U.S. part in bringing the Ba’athist to<br />

power, maintaining Saddam Hussein even through<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Richard A. Couto<br />

the bloody political purges of the 1960s, and<br />

supplying him with biological and chemical weapons<br />

material and<br />

o acknowledging the role that the U.S. insistence on the most<br />

stringent UN sanctions against Iraq played in reducing the<br />

infrastructure.<br />

We need to make the U.S. incidental liberation of Iraq into a deliberate,<br />

intentional, and successful international effort and we do not have much time<br />

to show our intentions and competence. Baghdad will probably sizzle the<br />

entire summer. We can hope, however, that serious discussion and some<br />

immediate action can support the hope of Iraqis for improvements to come<br />

and cool things off long enough to permit an intentional, effective,<br />

international, and genuine liberation of Iraq to begin. While we are doing<br />

this, of course, we must also pursue regime change in the U.S.<br />

Richard A. Couto is co-chair of the Task Force on Liaison with the University of<br />

Baghdad of Conscience International and professor of Leadership and Change at<br />

Antioch University. He traveled to the University of Baghdad in January for a<br />

symposium on peace and in June to renew conversations about the reconstruction<br />

of higher education.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


W<br />

Henry Pachter<br />

Who Are the Palestinians?<br />

by<br />

Henry Pachter<br />

ho are they, the Palestinians, and who has the right to speak for them?<br />

Oppressed nationalities find it difficult to get a hearing because those<br />

who pretend to represent them are often political adventurers who merely<br />

exploit them—whether for other powers’ imperialistic purposes or to vent on<br />

imaginary enemies their own hatred of the world. This is true of the Somalis,<br />

the Irish, the Bengalis, the Ibos; it is twice as true of the Palestinians because<br />

their country happens to lie at the crossroads of a world power struggle.<br />

Nowhere else do local enmities serve so many outside masters; nowhere else<br />

do foreign interests spread so much confusion about the very identity of the<br />

people whom they are pretending to save.<br />

So, first of all let us agree: like most Irish, most Palestinians are not terrorists;<br />

but like many Ulstermen or Basques, many Palestinians will condone or even<br />

applaud acts of terrorism as long as they lack other means to express what<br />

they consider their just grievances, and as long as those grievances continue to<br />

be seen as just by others. Let us also agree that their plight is not of their own<br />

making; they have been objects of other people’s policies for three thousand<br />

years.<br />

Palestine, the land of the Philistines, a Semitic people that once was<br />

subjugated by Joshua and by David, has retained that name through the<br />

centuries as it was conquered by Hittites, Egyptians, Babylonians, Assyrians,<br />

Persians, Greeks, Romans, Arabs, (1) Christians from the West, Osmanli<br />

Turks, and the British. Until recently in modern times it was sparsely settled,<br />

mostly by Arab Bedouins, and considered part of Syria. A movement to<br />

liberate and unite the Arabs, then under Turkish domination, existed long<br />

before the First World War.<br />

Then the British used Arab tribesmen to wrest Palestine, Mesopotamia<br />

(Iraq), and Syria from the Turks, promising them”sovereignty” and selfdetermination.<br />

After prolonged uprisings those parts of Syria that lay east of<br />

the Jordan River were given to Hashemite sheiks, who thereafter were called<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

kings; the part west of the Jordan River was styled the British Mandate of<br />

Palestine and supposed to evolve toward self-government; northern Syria<br />

became a French mandate. The terms of the mandates were illegal even by<br />

the standards of the Covenant of the League of Nations, which was their<br />

covering law. Previously, a unilateral declaration by Foreign Minister Arthur<br />

Balfour had designated “Palestine” as a “Jewish homeland”; but at the same<br />

time Weizmann and Lord Harlech assured the Arabs that this should not<br />

interfere with Arab aspirations to sovereignty.<br />

What these terms meant or how to reconcile them was never spelled out<br />

except in Balfour’s memoirs, where he wondered how anybody could have<br />

been misled into thinking that they meant anything (2). But on the evidence<br />

of contemporary customs and conditions, the Balfour Declaration was<br />

consistent with a Jewish immigration rate of 50,000 a year and a ratio of two<br />

to one between Muslims and Jews. In 1930, after serious Arab riots,<br />

immigration was severely restricted-just when Jews were desperate, not for a<br />

homeland but for a place of asylum. At the outbreak of World War II, the<br />

population consisted of 456,000 Jews and 1.1 million Muslims; at its end,<br />

the census counted 1.143 million Muslims, 583,000 Jews, and 145,000<br />

Christians.<br />

The Holocaust and the war left the Allies with a “disposal problem” in<br />

western Europe: nearly 100,000 East European Jews who had been made<br />

homeless by persecution and political changes were languishing in displacedpersons<br />

camps, fed by charitable contributions and government aid, mostly<br />

from the United States which, however, did not lift its own restrictions on<br />

immigrants from Eastern Europe. Responding to strong pressures from<br />

Zionist organizations—and minding the electoral situation at home—<br />

President Truman resolved the problem by agreeing to the foundation of a<br />

Jewish state in Palestine. Soviet diplomacy gladly gave its assent, viewing any<br />

diminution of the British Empire as so much gain for itself, and hoping to<br />

ingratiate itself with both Jews and Arabs.<br />

At first the British wanted to build a base in Haifa because, ironically, they<br />

were about to fulfill another Arab demand: to evacuate the base in<br />

Alexandria. On the other hand, a White Paper of 1939 also promised<br />

independence to Palestine. Weary of Arab terrorism and immediately<br />

prompted by Jewish terrorism, the Labour Party government decided to<br />

abandon the thankless task of policing the peace between Jews and Arabs. (3)<br />

The deal was consummated by a United Nations Security Council resolution<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

(4) the only instrument of international law on which the state of lsrael can<br />

base its existence.<br />

It is therefore necessary to remember that the United Nations at that time<br />

created not one state but two on the west side of the Jordan: one Jewish and<br />

one Arab. The Jewish state so created was totally nonviable: it consisted of<br />

three noncontiguous parts encompassing most Jewish settlements and a like<br />

number of Arab settlements. Even Ben Gurion, however, accepted this rump<br />

territory because at that time he still assumed that Palestine would remain an<br />

economic unit where two peoples would be able to develop in symbiosis—a<br />

binational state in all but name.<br />

A word about this assumed symbiosis. Not only Jews but Arabs too had come<br />

into Palestine, attracted by the higher wages and better working conditions<br />

under Jewish employers, or simply by the promise of prosperity that the<br />

Jewish immigration and its foreign backers brought to the country. The<br />

Jewish labor organization, Histadruth, had seen with alarm how fellow Jews<br />

were hiring Arab labor at low wages while Jewish immigrants were jobless.<br />

From the early 1920s on, therefore, the Histadruth had been waging a<br />

campaign “to fight for places to work.” (5) Its strongly nationalistic appeal<br />

brought quick success to this campaign: by the 1930s Arabs worked for Jews<br />

mostly in menial positions that Jewish workers would not accept. Even so, a<br />

remarkable number of Arabs in Palestine prospered, learned mechanical<br />

skills, and went to college, so that former Palestinians now occupy enviable<br />

positions in all Arab countries as executives, opinion leaders, professional<br />

people, foremen, and skilled workers.<br />

There is no doubt that the socioeconomic upset emanating from Jewish<br />

Palestine was one of the reasons for Arab sheiks, kings, and capitalists to fear<br />

the establishment of a Jewish state. Another was the threat of Jewish mass<br />

immigration and the growth of a new power center that was bound to<br />

subvert the status quo in the Middle East. At that time, only twenty years<br />

after the Balfour Declaration, Zionism was still considered a tool of British<br />

imperialism, and the Mufti of Jerusalem broadcast for Hitler from Berlin<br />

during the Second World War. To him, as to many Arabs today, Zionism<br />

was the imperialists’ base in the Middle East.<br />

A lot of silly arguments have been heard about this catchword, imperialism.<br />

Does it apply to Zionism? It is true that Orde Wingate trained the Haganah<br />

(Jewish underground defense organization); but another British officer,<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

Glubb Pasha, led the army of Transjordan. And eighty years before these<br />

events, Lord Palmerston sponsored the unification of Italy; will anyone<br />

therefore charge that Garibaldi was a tool of British imperialism? The Jewish<br />

state was the goal of a national conquest; its conflict with Arab states or Arab<br />

interests is on the order of national rivalries, and this remains true even if<br />

Jews or Arabs or both are allied with imperial powers. At one time the British<br />

favored the Jews, but after 1930 they found Zionist presumptions<br />

increasingly embarrassing. Zionism exploited British power and then turned<br />

against it. The British, in turn, contrary to Lenin’s theory of imperialism, did<br />

not mean to “exploit” Palestine economically but, as the mandate power, to<br />

prohibit the development of Jewish industries.<br />

The United States has invested heavily in Arab oil developments. The charge<br />

that it uses Israel to keep the sheiks docile, however, is totally unfounded<br />

and, on the face of it, ridiculous. The policy of the oil companies and of the<br />

State Department has been consistently pro-Arab unless one defines as pro-<br />

Israel any policy not aiming at the destruction of the Jewish state. The<br />

responsibility for Israel’s preservation, as for some other elements of the status<br />

quo the United States is committed to defend, has been a heavy burden. But<br />

it is in the nature of empires to be drawn into national border conflicts where<br />

their clients have interests, and very often they would rather not have to<br />

support them. Far from being used by the Russians or the Americans for their<br />

purposes, both Arabs and Jews have deliberately involved their big brothers in<br />

their own defense concerns.<br />

Much has been made of the Histadruth’s job policy. Obviously, in terms of<br />

Lenin’s theory of imperialism, Jewish business has not been guilty of<br />

exploiting cheap Arab labor; rather, Jewish colonists have been guilty of<br />

making Arabs jobless and driving them from their lands. I have to explain<br />

here a subtlety of feudal law: fellahin can be sold along with the land on<br />

which they have been sitting, but the land cannot be sold without them; it<br />

cannot be pulled away from under their feet. When the Jewish agency, aware<br />

only of capitalist law, bought land from the callous effendis, it may honestly<br />

have thought that thereby it had acquired the right to expel the fellahin,<br />

which repeats the story of the “enclosures,” well known to readers of Marx’s<br />

Capital. As the Phoenicians had done at Carthage and the Athenians in<br />

Sicily, the Jews acquired land and Jewish colons “settled” it. This is the<br />

original meaning of “colonization.” (6)<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

Notwithstanding Lenin, it may be called an imperialist policy on the part of<br />

the nation that hopes to prevail in such a fight for the land. Jewish settlers,<br />

who had naively begun to cultivate this ground -including kibbutzniks who<br />

did so in the name of socialism - wondered why the former owners or tenants<br />

of those grounds were firing at them or staging surprise attacks on their<br />

innocent children; from the vantage point of the expelled Palestinians, the<br />

settlers were usurpers, colonizers, imperialists in flesh and blood, not just the<br />

tools of mysterious powers across the sea. (7)<br />

This is the background of the war of 1948, which resulted in Israel’s<br />

conquest of a contiguous territory (within the boundaries of 1948-1967) and<br />

in the Hashemite annexation of territory west of the Jordan River, including<br />

part of Jerusalem and such Biblical cities as Bethlehem and Nablus. Perhaps<br />

even more important for our present purposes, it resulted in the flight of<br />

600,000 Arabs from their native home (8). In the light of the communal<br />

strife that had preceded the British pullout, that flight is totally<br />

understandable. A sensible person avoids being in anybody’s line of fire,<br />

especially in this kind of civil war. The Jewish defense organizations had<br />

taken care to project an image of fierceness. Some, like Menachem Begin’s<br />

Irgun Zwai Leumi and the Stern gang, were outright terrorists; their tactics<br />

appalled even Ben Gurion. (9) In June 1945 the Irgun blew up the King<br />

David Hotel, causing ninety-one deaths. British soldiers were shot by snipers;<br />

cars loaded with dynamite were driven into British army camps. Do these<br />

people have a right to complain about terrorism? Even the Palmach, the<br />

combat organization of the Haganah, blew up bridges and derailed trains.<br />

The crimes that had been committed in a few—fortunately very few—places<br />

had frightened the Arabs; when war came to their area, they followed the<br />

advice to stay clear of it. In so doing, they indicated that they were not taking<br />

part in the war operations. Clearly, in all wars of the past, displaced<br />

populations did expect to go back to their places of home, of work, of<br />

personal contacts. To keep them from returning, to forbid them a choice<br />

between staying abroad and accepting conquest, violates custom and<br />

international law—in fact it is a crime. Yet, for reasons of national policy, the<br />

Israeli government seized this opportunity to create a demographically<br />

homogeneous Jewish state. (10)<br />

IT WAS AT THIS MOMENT, and through this deed, that the issue of “the<br />

Palestinians” was created. So far, we have encountered Palestinians as the<br />

inhabitants of an area that might include all of the present state of Jordan, or<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

only the population of the Mandate territory. Now the name has come to<br />

define almost exclusively the million Arabs who claimed that they had been<br />

expelled from their homeland and who were forced to live in primitive camps<br />

spread outside Israel in the Gaza strip, on the West Bank, in Lebanon, and in<br />

Syria. These camps were maintained by UNRRA, a United Nations affiliate,<br />

and financed mostly by American contributions.<br />

Aside from the moral and humanitarian outrage they constitute, maintaining<br />

these camps was a political mistake of the first order. They became hotbeds of<br />

unrest, recruiting grounds for terrorist organizations, breeding places for<br />

corruption, blackmail, and crime. A few cents a day per head, amounting to<br />

many millions of dollars per year, meant an invitation to count many heads<br />

twice. The fraudulent claim that there are 2 million people in those camps is<br />

clearly exposed by the census figures of 1946. Even if every single Arab in all<br />

of Palestine had fled, there could still not be more than 1.2 million. Of<br />

course in the thirty years that have elapsed, the original 600,000 have been<br />

blessed with children and grandchildren; even some “dead souls” may have<br />

been procreative.<br />

No one denies that many Arabs on the West Bank considered the miserable<br />

allowance in the camps preferable to their normal subsistence under Arab<br />

governments. On the other hand, genuine refugees from Palestine left the<br />

camps and found lucrative employment in other Arab states; many others<br />

died. All remain statistics in the camp population, and so are their children,<br />

although the children may live in other countries. By the most conservative<br />

statistics, therefore, more than half of the present camp inmates never lived in<br />

Israel. The Israelis who justify their claim to the land by the tribal memory of<br />

two thousand years obviously have no argument against people whose claim<br />

is based on tribal memories reaching back only thirty years. More than the<br />

expellees’ actual misery, the bitterness of the sacrifice that was imposed on<br />

them intensifies the hatred that defines the Palestinians as a nation distinct<br />

from other Arabs.<br />

Should the displaced Palestinians have been admitted by other Arab states?<br />

The Germans expelled from Eastern Europe after the Second World War<br />

were among the Federal Republic’s greatest assets. England admitted West<br />

Indians and mestizos whose country had become someone’s state. Why do<br />

not Syria, Egypt, Lebanon, or rich Kuwait, Algeria, Saudi Arabia help their<br />

Palestinian brothers—for whom they shed such abundant tears—get<br />

integrated into their countries? Although the oil sheiks have the means, they<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

feel no obligation to do so. (11) Actually, they would rather use these<br />

unfortunate victims of national wars as pawn in their own game of power<br />

politics. They are not interested in healing this wound; they want it to fester,<br />

but in the body of Israel, and in the body of world peace.<br />

How could this have been prevented? At some point between 1948 and<br />

1968, the United States should have stopped subsidizing the refugee camps<br />

and Israel should have made an offer that might have, in one bold stroke,<br />

drastically reduced the number of “Palestinians” and disarmed their<br />

militancy. The offer should have been based on recognition of legitimate<br />

claims by those who could prove that they had lost their property, home, or<br />

job in the present territory of Israel. They should have been given the option<br />

of either a settlement in money or return under Israeli law. Since the<br />

conditions of life as a second-class citizen are never enviable, even when the<br />

nationalities are not emotionally hostile to each other, I believe that few<br />

Palestinians would have opted for return. Most would rather have taken the<br />

money, especially if at the same time U.S. subsidies had been ended. (12)<br />

The Jewish authorities and public opinion have rejected such proposals on<br />

the twofold ground that Israel could not accommodate so many Arabs<br />

without disrupting her economy and without endangering the safety of her<br />

state. (13) The first part of this rejoinder sounds odd in view of their steady<br />

clamor for more immigrants from countries holding more Jews than there are<br />

Arab statistics in the camps. The second part is refuted by the results of the<br />

Six-Day War, which has added another million Arabs to the population of<br />

Israel and many Israelis now speak of a “Greater Israel.”<br />

Most Israelis would probably want to keep the occupied areas if they could<br />

move the Arabs out, while Arab nationalism, strangely, demands the return<br />

of uninhabited desert first and liberation of the bemoaned brothers later.<br />

In fact, Palestinians are not just the refugees in the camps of 1948. There are<br />

a million Arabs who live under military authorities in conquered territory.<br />

Despite the greater prosperity that annexation has brought to them, they are<br />

a source of unrest and an acute danger to peace. There can be no settlement,<br />

no truce, and no confidence between Arabs and Jews as long as their status is<br />

not determined equitably and as long as there is no international machinery<br />

to ascertain the will of the Palestinians themselves. Unless a political dialogue<br />

is initiated between Israel and responsible Arab leaders—a dialogue about<br />

concrete proposals, that will satisfy legitimate claims—Yasir Arafat will step<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

into the vacuum and pretend that he knows what the Palestinians want, and<br />

he will go on blackmailing his Arab friends and the international community.<br />

He also has rivals: should he not occupy the vacuum, some terrorist group or<br />

perhaps even the Communist Party will. The ball, therefore, is in Israel’s<br />

court. (14)<br />

At the time of the Six-Day War, the Israeli government declared that it<br />

would hold the occupied territories only as pawns and evacuate them in<br />

return for a peace treaty. It has offered to pay compensation to those who<br />

have lost property in old Palestine—or rather, to allow the United States to<br />

make such payments; but it has not given refugees a choice of taking<br />

payment or returning. Meanwhile, the cancer of the Palestinians not only<br />

continues to fester but is being transplanted to the world arena, where it eats<br />

away the possibilities of peaceful coexistence. A decision is urgently needed to<br />

attack the primary point of the evil. Neither recriminations about the past<br />

nor legal constructions of right and wrong are required. What is required is<br />

finding political answers to political problems.<br />

The offer to receive or to compensate legitimate claimants might be made<br />

with greater confidence by the Israeli government if at the same time the<br />

Palestinians were to be offered a state of their own. It has been suggested that<br />

the West Bank and the Gaza strip—two noncontiguous territories—would<br />

constitute such a state. Unfortunately, that state would not be economically<br />

viable; hence it would be a pawn in the political game of the oil sheiks. Nor<br />

would such a proposal be politically acceptable without including the Arab<br />

part of Jerusalem. The Israelis are loath to give up any part of Jerusalem, and<br />

there is at this time no device of condominium or international control that<br />

would make the administration of the city possible without friction. It is clear<br />

that the real point of the quarrel is not viability but sovereignty. All the<br />

principals are too primitive in their tribal instincts or too immature as nations<br />

to be reasonable on questions where self-respect is at stake. Therefore, the<br />

solution for Jerusalem will have to be imposed by the great powers; it cannot<br />

be negotiated between the parties concerned. As long as they pretend to<br />

negotiate about it, they merely indicate that they do not mean to make peace.<br />

By contrast, the return of the occupied territories must be negotiated by<br />

Israel itself with its neighbors, and the return of the refugees can be<br />

negotiated only privately between the Israeli government and those private<br />

parties who claim to have been residents of the area now under the<br />

government’s jurisdiction. By its very nature, this cannot be a problem<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

between Israel and Egypt or Syria, for neither of these countries claims<br />

sovereignty in Palestine. It could be negotiated between Israel and a state that<br />

can speak in the name of the Palestinians. These are a distinct people,<br />

different in background and culture from the Bedouins of Jordan, from the<br />

mercantile Lebanese, from the temperamental Syrians, from the millennia old<br />

Egyptians. They must determine their own fate, both in Israel and in the<br />

West Bank area. They would probably prefer to sever their political ties with<br />

Jordan and might be interested in economic arrangements, to mutual<br />

advantage, with Israel. It stands to reason that they would rather not fight<br />

Boumédienne’s wars and that the skimpy subsidies some of their guerrillas<br />

are getting from oil sheiks cannot substitute for a developmental plan and a<br />

technology to go with it. In the long run, a Palestinian state on the West<br />

Bank might easily fall into Israel’s orbit, or become a client of Moscow,<br />

Beijing, Washington, Teheran—who knows?<br />

It is not necessary to believe that appeasement will bring an early cessation of<br />

terrorist attacks or a lowering of the level of invective in Arab rhetoric. But it<br />

may lay the foundation of a more constructive relationship between the Arabs<br />

and Jews on the local level and perhaps bring to old Palestine some kind of<br />

unity on the basis of economic interests and businesslike relations. In other<br />

words: it is necessary to strip this political problem of ideology. Although in<br />

this age everybody is “raising consciousness” or seeking to establish an<br />

identity, there is altogether too much of that in the Middle East. The<br />

Palestinians speak Arabic and worship in mosques; but they have come from<br />

many countries and have intermarried with many conquering nations. Their<br />

identity is of rather recent origin, through the misfortunes of war and yet<br />

another foreign conquest. Their appeasement ought to be less difficult than<br />

their arousal. They are looking for opportunities. I am even tempted to say<br />

that they can be bought; but they are being terrorized, and this may be the<br />

greatest obstacle to peace at this moment.<br />

Can Israel wager her security on the vague prospect that one day the<br />

Palestinians might not only awaken but also mature? There are no<br />

alternatives, and one must look for solutions that have some promise of<br />

lasting. One may hope to prevent an explosion though one may not be able<br />

to remove the dynamite. Above all one must divide, not unite, one’s enemies.<br />

Third World strategists have made the Palestinian issue into a cutting edge of<br />

their attack on Western positions in world politics. To blunt that edge, it is<br />

not necessary for the United States to take drastic measures, though it needs<br />

to radically rethink the issue. The friends of Israel—and, surprisingly, that<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

includes many who have valiantly criticized “Cold war attitudes” in U. S.<br />

policies—are tied to the confrontational patterns of the past decades; they<br />

think in terms of security rather than in political terms. They have missed<br />

valuable opportunities for peace in the past ten years. They gamble on the<br />

survival chances of a particular structure of the Israeli state, which is a<br />

dangerous gamble at best and is becoming more dangerous every day. The<br />

thought of having Arab citizens in their midst horrifies the Israelis; but while<br />

staring at that danger, they don’t see the gathering of Arab armies outside the<br />

gate. They have too much confidence that the gate can be held shut for all<br />

time; this is an illusion for which others have paid dearly. In the long run,<br />

security lies only in the confidence of one’s neighbors.<br />

Aware that I have made some controversial statements, I want to make clear<br />

that the issue is neither moral nor judicial, but political. Those who wish to<br />

debate my proposal should refrain from reminding me who “started it” or<br />

who is “more to blame” or whose “rights” are better. Wherever I have<br />

touched upon such questions, my intention has merely been to show how<br />

Palestinians see them, and that is a political fact, not a moral judgment.<br />

Notes<br />

1. Arabs today identify themselves only by speech. Originally the term<br />

means conquerors coming from the Peninsula.<br />

2. In 1922, Colonial Secretary Winston Churchill rejected the<br />

interpretation that Arab laws and customs had to be subordinated to<br />

Jewish interests, and Arab representatives rejected every constitution<br />

the British or the League of Nations tried to impose on the country.<br />

The Arab Congress in 1928 demanded a “fully democratic”<br />

government—whatever that meant in terms of Arab constitutions.<br />

3. Foreign Secretary Ernest Bevin was no “anti-Semite”; he simply<br />

dropped a hot potato that cost England 50 million pounds a year. He<br />

was not the only Englishman, however, to wonder why the Jews were<br />

turning against England—of all nations—which had fought Hitler.<br />

Gratitude is not a political word, but bitterness is.<br />

4. The United Nations then had fifty-seven members; obviously the<br />

resolution would not pass today. Except for states recognized in the<br />

Westphalian Peace Treaty (1648) and at the Vienna Congress (1815),<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

no other state has received such sanction. States are usually a product<br />

of violence.<br />

5. This was the term used abroad; the Hebrew term sounds less<br />

offensive.<br />

6. A reader points out that the number affected was comparatively small<br />

and that terrorism developed mostly in the cities. Unfortunately, the<br />

symbolic and political value of the object does not depend on its size<br />

or price.<br />

7. “The revolt is largely manned by the peasantry, that is to say by the<br />

people whose life and livelihood are on the soil but who have no say<br />

whatever in its disposal; and their anger and violence are as much<br />

directed against the Arab landowners and brokers who have facilitated<br />

the sales as against the policy of the mandatory Power under whose<br />

aegis the transactions have taken place. The fact that some of those<br />

landowners have served on national Arab bodies makes them only<br />

more odious to the insurgent peasantry and has rendered it less<br />

amenable to the influence of the political leaders as a whole.” George<br />

Antonius, The Arab Awakening: The Story of the Arab National<br />

Movement (New York: Lippincott, 1939), pp. 406-7. The Jewish<br />

leaders—except for the Communists, Martin Buber, and some<br />

chalutzim—never thought of allying themselves with these victims of<br />

colonization. See Bernard Avishai in Dissent, Spring 1975.<br />

8. Some say the number was 800,000—more than had been living in<br />

the Jewish half of Palestine.<br />

9. Obviously, what applies to Arabs must apply to Jews. Most Jews may<br />

not have approved of terrorism—though my father, usually one of<br />

the most law-abiding citizens, did; but Arabs are even less able than<br />

Jews to distinguish between factions in the other camp. The crime<br />

must be condemned; an entire people must not be condemned for it.<br />

But I am not arguing here about the morality of terror; my aim is to<br />

establish the fact that the Arab population felt threatened.<br />

10. Unfortunately, socialists like Dissent contributors Avishai and N.<br />

Gordon Levin have defended this theft on the ground that “socialist<br />

values” can be realized better in a securely Jewish environment.<br />

Would they agree with the Soviet government that “Soviet values”<br />

can be realized better in an environment that does not include<br />

Solzhenitsyn, Pasternak, or Trotsky?<br />

11. Israel claims that she accepted a million Oriental Jews, mostly<br />

expelled from the Arab countries. The rationale of the Jewish<br />

”homeland,” however, conflicts with the suggestion that these should<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Henry Pachter<br />

be balanced against the Arab expellees. They would be entitled to<br />

Israeli citizenship even without being harassed in Baghdad. Besides, a<br />

forcible population exchange is repugnant from any internationalist<br />

perspective.<br />

12. Gordon Levin rejects the notion that readmission could “serve [any]<br />

real human interests besides a satisfaction of Arab honor.” But that is<br />

a question of deep concern, and it is in Israel’s power to restore that<br />

sense of honor.<br />

13. It seems that Zionism has abandoned its earliest propaganda, which<br />

claimed that a Jewish state would make its Arab citizens happy and<br />

contented.<br />

14. Arab notables in the occupied areas are subject to intimidation; some<br />

Israelis therefore think that Arafat is the only available partner. It is<br />

certain that no parley is now conceivable without him, a calamity that<br />

conforms to the pattern of the Israeli’s poor grasp of diplomatic<br />

realities: they have always been forced to choose between two evils<br />

after they had rejected an alternative that would have been, after all,<br />

second best.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


I<br />

Abbas Amanat<br />

From ijtihad to wilayat-i faqih:<br />

The Evolving of the Shi’ite Legal Authority to Political Power<br />

by<br />

Abbas Amanat<br />

n November 2002 an Iranian professor of history, Hashim Aghajari, a<br />

veteran of the Iran-Iraq war, was sentenced to death by the Islamic<br />

revolutionary court in <strong>Hamad</strong>an among other counts for questioning the<br />

practice of blind “emulating/following” (taqlid) of the mujtahids in matters of<br />

belief and practice. His sentencing led to several days of widespread<br />

university protests fueled by Aghajari’s refusal to appeal his death sentence.<br />

What incensed the Iranian court which accused him of blasphemy was that,<br />

by implication, Aghajari was denying the “authority/guardianship of the<br />

jurist” (Persian, wilayat-i faqih; Arabic, al-wilaya al-faqih), the very founding<br />

principal of the Islamic Republic. Aghajari’s objection aimed not merely at<br />

the practice of taqlid, but the legitimacy (or their lack of) of the “guardian<br />

jurist” (wali-yi faqih), the “supreme leader” of the Islamic Republic. This new<br />

anti-clerical quest for Islamic modernity naturally steered much interest<br />

among younger generations of Iranians.<br />

Aghajaris’ speech commemorated ’Ali Shari’ati, the renowned revolutionary<br />

reformist. Invoking Shari’ati’s notion of “Islamic Protestantism” as the only<br />

way to liberate the society from the impasse of the “traditional Islam,”<br />

Aghajari was striving to arrive at a new historical understanding of the Shi’ite<br />

heritage. Though still grounded in the Qur’an and hadith, this new reading<br />

was engaged more deeply with modernity, human rights and plurality.<br />

Aghajari called for social justice and democracy in economy and in politics<br />

though he implicitly distanced himself from Shari’ati’s firebrand<br />

revolutionary rhetoric. He does not remain untouched by Shari’ati’s<br />

exhortations to be the prophet of Protestant Islam, a claim made by a<br />

number of Islamic reformers including the celebrated Jamal al-Din<br />

“Afghani,” the Iranian pan-Islamic activist of the 19th century. Yet he goes so<br />

far as criticizing the Shi’ite establishment for its culture of condescension<br />

especially in the exercise of ijtihad:<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

The people are not monkeys who merely imitate. The pupil<br />

understands and then acts, and then tries to expand his own<br />

understanding, so someday he will not need the teacher. He<br />

can himself directly look up (the sources) and deduct and<br />

form an opinion. The relationship that the traditional<br />

institution (i.e. the clerical establishment) seeks is one of<br />

master and the follower; the master remains master and the<br />

follower remains follower. Forever these shackles straps<br />

around his neck. The relationship of the (real) scholar (`alim )<br />

with people is a critical one. Since he has expert knowledge,<br />

we listen to him as a scholar. Whenever we find something<br />

objectionable, we criticize, we debate. He is not a saintly<br />

celestial being to be treated by us as a divine figure. Of course<br />

this class (i.e. the clergy) first turned the infallible (Shi`ite)<br />

Imams to divine figures so that they themselves could pose as<br />

divine representatives of the Imams. 1<br />

Such critique of the abiding authority of ijtihad and that of the so-called<br />

“source of emulation” (marja’-i taqlid) inevitably bring to light the much<br />

debated issue of legal authority in Shi’ite Islam and, more specifically, the<br />

problem of institutionalization of ijtihad. He obviously does not address<br />

openly the wilayat-i faqih, but his reference to the “imam” in the above<br />

passage, as in other allusions sprinkled throughout his speech, signifies the<br />

obvious to his sensitive audience. He deliberately seems to have touched on a<br />

sore point since the doctrine of the “guardianship of the jurists,” it can be<br />

argued, stands on shaky legal grounds. Shi’ism never historically or<br />

institutionally made the necessary leap from the loosely defined ijtihad to a<br />

centralized marja’iya, let alone ever develop the theoretical ground for<br />

creating a universal judicial authority.<br />

Before the time of Ayatollah Khomeini, Shi’i legal thought never did<br />

seriously engage in the sphere of public law and consequently never<br />

articulated a coherent theory of government. Even in the safety of the<br />

madrasa, Shi’ite law remained entirely preoccupied with the articulation of<br />

civil and private law as practiced in the mujtahid-run civil courts. Such<br />

practice of ijtihad was never systematized or subjected to clear and universally<br />

accepted norms, one may venture to say, almost by choice. The Shi’ite law on<br />

which the mujtahids relied remained a matter of interpretation and scholastic<br />

scrutiny largely within the madrasa environment rather than through the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

practice of the law. Throughout the Safavid and the early Qajar periods (16th<br />

to 19th centuries) Shi’ite law acquired a remarkable level of sophistication,<br />

especially in the theoretical field of the “roots of jurisprudence” (usul al-fiqh).<br />

Yet both in the study of the rudiments (furu’) and in the methodology of usul<br />

al-fiqh Shi’ite scholarship resisted systematic codification beyond what was<br />

established by earlier scholars largely between the 10th and 14th centuries.<br />

Even the “emergence” of the status of the “supreme exemplar” (marja’-i<br />

taqlid, lit. the source of emulation) in the 19th century remained largely an<br />

informal practice. No set of objective standards for designating such a<br />

leadership ever developed and no specific legal privileges were arrogated to<br />

this office. As late as the middle of the 20 th century, the marja’iyat was largely<br />

aimed at addressing the needs for a communal leadership rather than a<br />

supreme legal authority. No marj’a before Ayatullah Burujerdi ever claimed<br />

his legal opinions to be universally binding. Nor any of the marja’s claimed<br />

to be standing at the apex of a judicial hierarchy or was accepted as such by<br />

the mujtahids or by the community at large. Whenever they effectively<br />

exercised their legal power, as in the tobacco rebellion of 1890-91 or during<br />

the Constitutional Revolution of 1906-1911 or the banning of the drinking<br />

of Pepsi Cola in the 1950s, the marja’s relied on their popularity and prestige<br />

rather than any legal precept. The three preconditions for a marja’, being the<br />

most learned (a’lam), the most judicious (a’dal), and the most pious (atqa),<br />

were qualities barely measurable by legal or academic standards. No<br />

institutional procedure was ever set to determine such preconditions. What<br />

in reality determined success of a marja’, or for that matter any mujtahid, was<br />

his popularity and the size of his follower constituency (or congregation).<br />

The question thus remains as to what process, historical and legal,<br />

transformed this informal and democratically chaotic form of defuse judicial<br />

leadership into a binding, all-embracing, and authoritative office of the<br />

wilayat-i faqih with claim over the judicial and political authority.<br />

Ijtihad and the Usuli interpretation of judicial authority<br />

As early as the 10th century the so-called 12th Shi’ite (Ithna ’Ashari) jurists<br />

recognized the Occultation (ghayba) of the 12th Imam, the state of his<br />

invisible (but directly inaccessible) existence in the physical world, as the<br />

chief postulate for denouncing any form of temporal power in the absence of<br />

the Imam as inherently unjust and therefore illegitimate. Only the return of<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

the Imam in an undetermined moment in future, it was believed, could<br />

establish on earth the ultimate values of justice and legitimate rule. This<br />

absolutist messianic belief in the Imam’s eventual establishing of a utopian<br />

perfect order has often been viewed as the chief obstacle on the way of<br />

articulating a legal public space in Shi’ism. The same rationale also barred in<br />

theory any legitimate collaboration between the jurists and the state. Every<br />

government was in theory seen as inherently oppressive. The same principle<br />

of avoiding political collaboration was conducive to the flourishing of the<br />

Shi’ite study of hadith, as means of emulating the models of the Prophet and<br />

the Imams, and early development of jurisprudence (fiqh) focusing on civil<br />

and contractual law as well as on devotional acts and obligations.<br />

In practice, however, the quietist tendency among the Shi’ite jurists, as<br />

opposed to powerful messianic trends throughout the Shi’ite past,<br />

encouraged compliance and even collaboration with the “unjust” and<br />

“tyrannical” (ja’ir) state especially if and when the state was accommodating<br />

the Shi’is. This de facto acceptance of the temporal power, needless to say,<br />

was in full agreement with the ancient Persian notion of the “sisterhood” of<br />

the religious and the state institutions, a interdependency perceived to be<br />

essential for the endurance of both institutions and the stability of the social<br />

order against the corrupting influence of “bad religion” (i.e., the antinomian,<br />

often messianic, alternatives to legalistic Shi’ism). While the state maintained<br />

peace and order, upheld the shari’a, defended the domain, and guarded the<br />

jurists’ vested interests, the jurists were in turn expected to maintain good<br />

relations with the state, and even serve in the state-controlled judiciary.<br />

Already by the 14th century the Shi’ite jurists developed an elaborate legal<br />

system of private law based on ijtihad, the exercise of logical reasoning by<br />

utilizing the sources of the law to form qualified legal opinion within a<br />

specific timeframe. The exercise of ijtihad in turn led to the development of<br />

an elaborate methodology of jurisprudence, the science of the usul al-fiqh.<br />

Some of the best legal minds articulated complex linguistic debates on legal<br />

semantics and phenomenological discussions on the authority of the text. Yet<br />

oddly enough, usul al-fiqh avoided systematic debate on ijtihad, such as the<br />

mujtahids’ qualifications and institutional hierarchy, and failed to discuss<br />

such seemingly mundane issues as the madrasa curriculum. Nor did it address<br />

the inconsistencies and ambiguities of the Islamic law or question the<br />

rationale behind its archaic categorization.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

Even the establishment of the Safavid state (1501-1736) and declaration of<br />

Shi’ism as its official creed (in obvious contrast to the rival Ottoman empire’s<br />

expressed upholding of “orthodox” Sunni Islam) did not substantially alter<br />

the mujtahids resistance to institution development. This in spite of the<br />

Safavid dynasty’s presumed sacred lineage, its active sponsorship of the<br />

clerical establishment and heavy patronage of the teaching circles. The<br />

immigrant jurists from the Arab Shi’ites communities of Jabal ’Amil (in<br />

today’s Syria and Lebanon), Qatif and Bahrain in northern Arabia and the<br />

Persian Gulf, and Najaf and Hilla in southern Iraq were incorporated into<br />

the judiciary of the Safavid Empire. These mujtahids and their Iranian<br />

counterparts, many being converts from Sunnism, considered the Safavid<br />

shahs as legitimate defenders of the faith and their empire as the guarded<br />

Shi’ite domain. For the “learned” (’ulama) community it was therefore<br />

permissible to assume judicial offices, as majority did, collect alms and the so<br />

called the “share of the Imam,” and even to set the congregational Friday<br />

prayer which considered by majority of Shi’ite jurists as impermissible in the<br />

absence of the Imam of the Age.<br />

The jurists’ reluctance in this period to solidify their gains by implementing<br />

a judicial leadership independent from the state is not surprising. Their<br />

reluctance to better define the boundaries of ijtihad was in part because the<br />

Safavid rulers’ successfully recruited the mujtahids as state functionaries.<br />

Although the office of shaykh al-Islam was held by a high-ranking jurist, this<br />

was not understood to be a legal supervision over the entire judicial<br />

community. Nor did it mean administrative or financial control, a task that<br />

the Safavid state consistently conferred on a non-clerical bureaucrat with the<br />

title of sadr (i.e., the chielf officer). Moreover, the Safavids in the late 17 th<br />

century did not hesitate to patronize the alternative Akhbari school which in<br />

contradistinction to the Usuli school rejected ijtihad and its logical<br />

rationalization. The debate between the two schools in the late 17th and<br />

throughout the 18th centuries weakened the development of usul al-fiqh as a<br />

discretionary methodology and favored instead a wholesale and uncritical<br />

validation of all the hadith as sources of the law. More specifically, all reports<br />

(akhbar) from diverse Shi’ite hadith sources attributed to the Prophet and the<br />

Imams, were considered as authentic, with little discretion for their historical<br />

validity. The Akhbari resistance to independent reasoning was congruent<br />

with the Safavid state’s aversion to allow the emergence of an independent<br />

mujtahid-dominated judiciary.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

After the collapse of the Safavid Empire in 1736 and the ensuing political<br />

instability, Usulism reemerged as the predominant legal school in the late<br />

18th and early 19th century. In the early decades of the 19th century the<br />

Usuli jurists made evident gains in socio-economic and educational areas<br />

hence laying the foundation for a clerical establishment that continued with<br />

little interruption up to the present. They monopolized the madrasas’<br />

education and the pulpit of the mosques, controlled charitable endowments<br />

(awqaf), and posed as the only legitimate recipient of religious taxes. They<br />

developed amicable though somewhat distant relations with the early rulers<br />

of the Qajar dynasty (1785-1925), a mutually beneficial relation that brought<br />

about the golden age of Usuli ijtihad. The growth of religious circles first in<br />

Najaf, where Akhbarism was soundly defeated, and later in the Iranian cities<br />

such as Isfahan and Qum was supported with a large student body and with a<br />

closely-nit network of mater-pupil patronage. Impressive number of legal<br />

works were produced both on the specifics of the law (furu’) and on the usul<br />

al-fiqh with implicit emphasis on the role of the mujtahids not only as legal<br />

scholars but judges and social mediators. The growth of congregations in<br />

mosques also strengthened jurists’ ties with social groups in search of legal<br />

support, most noticeably the merchants of the bazaar who backed the<br />

mujtahids and financed their teaching circles in exchange for legal security<br />

and representation.<br />

Yet with all the success in developing a semi-independent legal network and a<br />

solid lay constituency, the jurists of the Qajar period did not seek to<br />

reconstruct the theory of ijtihad and its application to public law. Despite<br />

occasional “turf wars” with the state over privilege and sphere of influence, or<br />

later in defiance of the state’s Westernizing policies, they continued to honor<br />

the dichotomy of the religious law (shar’), as it concerned the jurists, versus<br />

the customary law (’urf), as exercised by the state. Neither side, the jurists or<br />

the state (at least before the rise of the European-inspired reforms) attempted<br />

to define each of these two spheres of shar’ and ’urf or demarcate their<br />

boundaries by means of codification, let alone to breach the informal<br />

boundaries between them. The usul al-fiqh remained essentially concerned<br />

with its arcane debates on the legal method and legal sources. Voluminous<br />

works, commentaries and glosses on commentaries were produced by the<br />

Usuli scholars on intricate details of semantics and epistemology. Yet the<br />

mujtahids simply did not see the need for a centralized corporate identity or<br />

for disturbing the delicate balance with the state upon which they<br />

continuously negotiated their power. The state in turn preferred ambiguity<br />

whereby through consent and coercion it hoped to persuade the jurists to<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

comply with the state’s otherwise waning power and prestige. By the end of<br />

the century the jurists were more than ever isolated in their world of madrasa<br />

and private courts. Accordingly, the curriculum of the seminaries was<br />

substantially truncated to focus solely on legal studies at the expense of nonreligious<br />

and especially non-legal topics. Even such traditional fields as<br />

mathematics, astronomy, and philosophy were no longer part of the jurists’<br />

general education.<br />

Voices of protest to the jurists’ monopolies and their intellectual petrifaction<br />

further moved the mujtahids toward conservatism and added to their distaste<br />

for new approaches. Most significantly, the messianic Babi movement in the<br />

middle decades of the century questioned the very legitimacy of the clerical<br />

community, its theoretical premises, educational methods, and legal<br />

practices. The Babi religion (later to be transformed into the Baha’i faith)<br />

denied the long-held jurist position that they collectively represent the Imam<br />

of the Age in Occultation. The Babi apocalyptic movement with growing<br />

popularity not only sought leadership in the new “Imam of the Age,” but<br />

declared the end of the historical cycle of Islamic shari’a by ushering a new<br />

cycle of prophetic manifestation. In response to the Babi challenge, the jurists<br />

community closed ranks and came closer to full collaboration with the state<br />

in crushing the Babi revolution. In no other area the jurists heeded the Babi<br />

call for fundamental reform though in longer run the clerical community did<br />

produce a new form of communal leadership. The status of the marja’ that<br />

was first recognized for Shaykh Murtaza Ansari in the late 1850s, not<br />

surprisingly coincided with the growth of the Babi clandestine anti-clerical<br />

subversion. His emergence as the “supreme exemplar” no doubt mirrored the<br />

public desire for a clerical leadership committed to higher standards of<br />

morality, learning, and social justice. Ansari came to represent these values<br />

for a growing constituency of seminarians in the madrasas and among the lay<br />

followers.<br />

The idea of marja'iya as a communal leadership with an increasing claim over<br />

political process continued in the second half of the century and through the<br />

Constitutional Revolution (1906-1911). Perhaps the height of such<br />

politicized marja’iya came with Mirza Hasan Shirazi, the influential jurist and<br />

teacher whose access to funds and his ever-growing teaching circle placed him<br />

ahead of his competitors as the most widely recognized marja’. His general<br />

ban on the use of tobacco during the Regie protest of 1890-91 for the first<br />

time demonstrated the marja’s power against the state and European imperial<br />

monopolies. The channeling of public discontent into political discourse is<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

even more evident during the Constitutional Revolution. Several mujtahids,<br />

simultaneously recognized as marja`s, appealed to diverse constituencies with<br />

contesting political agendas. The breakdown of a united leadership during<br />

this period of political reform and Western-style secular democracy<br />

demonstrated the crucial role of the jurists' followers in promoting the cause<br />

of mujtahids on both sides of the constitutional debate. The greater<br />

polarization of the clergy especially over the issues of secular judiciary and<br />

civil liberties vouched for this multiplicity of leadership. A number of<br />

influential jurists who sided against a Western-style constitution and in favor<br />

of a Shari`a-based alternative were defeated and lost constituency and<br />

prestige, even their lives.<br />

From marja’iya to wilayat-i faqih<br />

ONLY IN THE LATTER PART OF THE 20th century do we witness the gradual<br />

shift back toward a centralized marja’iyya under Ayatollah Husayn Burujirdi.<br />

He should be viewed as the first to hold a united leadership not only in the<br />

management of the Qum seminaries, collection of the religious taxes and<br />

distribution, but a certain degree of legal authority over the clerical<br />

community. It goes without saying that the “emergence” of this form of<br />

centralized marja’iya was a belated, albeit inevitable, response to the state’s<br />

intrusion into the judicial domain. The rise of the Pahlavi secular autocracy<br />

from the middle of the 1920s precipitated the growth of modern educational<br />

institutions. It abolished the mujtahids’ civil courts and replaced them with a<br />

state-controlled judiciary. The state regulating the use of charitable<br />

endowments, and similar measures undermined the ’ulama’s social status and<br />

affected their economic influence. The growth of the secularized or semisecularized<br />

middle classes and popularity of a variety of religious and<br />

ideological challenges, from the Baha’i faith to Marxism and Western-style<br />

modernity, persuaded the demoralized and shrunken clerical community to<br />

try to reorganize the madrasa and to solidify its network at the national level.<br />

Most importantly, the jurists gradually moved away from the state-’ulama<br />

alliance that was founded on the ancient principle of preserving social<br />

equilibrium through guarded collaboration. In due course the new marja’iya<br />

reconstituted its base not only in the bazaar community, where it was<br />

traditionally strong, but among a new class of urban and urbanized poor.<br />

They offered a pool for clerical recruitment and an enthusiastic mosque<br />

congregation.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

Such greater solidarity and group identity however did not result in<br />

reconsideration of the Shi’ite legal thought or any serious attempt to<br />

institutionalize the informal marja’iya leadership. Study of fiqh in the<br />

seminaries of Najaf, Qum and elsewhere remained almost entirely loyal to the<br />

arcane precepts and practices of the Shi’ite law and its obsessive<br />

preoccupation with devotional acts (’ibadat) and contracts (’uqud). The<br />

striking persistence of legal archaism among the Shi’ite jurists can be<br />

explained in part by inherent conservatism of the legal curriculum and in part<br />

by isolation from the society’s new secular discourse. Left out of the new<br />

state-run judiciary, the Shi’ite teaching circles in Najaf and Qum made<br />

almost no attempt to address new issues of public law or even offer a modern<br />

reading of the old legal texts. The so-called hawzas continued to operate<br />

along the informal teacher-pupil patronage and produce growing number of<br />

jurists and/or preachers in need of new congregations.<br />

A number of marja’s that “emerged” after the death of Burujirdi in 1960,<br />

including Ayatollah Khomeini, were no doubt more organized in their<br />

teaching and charitable operations. Yet there was no attempt in the clerical<br />

circles to revisit the nature and conditions of marja’iya, let alone arrive at a<br />

consensus about criteria for such leadership or the hierarchy. As much as the<br />

lay constituency of the marja’as grew and the funding sources improved, no<br />

equivalent of an ecclesiastical hierarchy emerged even though there existed a<br />

fairly coherent network of the ’ulama throughout Iran, southern Iraq and<br />

Lebanon.<br />

The defuse marja’iya leadership of this period relied heavily on both the lay<br />

and the clerical “followers.” To mark their place in a complex game of<br />

prestige and popularity the marja’s depended on their followers for higher<br />

standing. Naturally, at times they were bound by their whims and wishes. As<br />

Mutraza Mutahhari, a prominent follower of Khomeini and a leader of the<br />

future Islamic revolution pointed out in the early 1960’s, in this popularity<br />

contest no marja` could survive without his constituency's financial and<br />

moral backing. In a conference organized by some religious modernists on<br />

the theme of marja’iyat, the largely modernists, among them Mahdi<br />

Bazargan, joined together with a new generation of activist clerics, such as<br />

Mutahhri, to urge the marja’s to bring some order into the notoriously<br />

chaotic world of Shi’i clerical leadership.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

The greater politicization of the clerical community, and especially the<br />

clerical clique around Ayatollah Khomeini from mid-1960s, responded<br />

positively to this call. Among the marja’s of Qum and Najaf, Khomeini<br />

represented the most radical political position. His open anti-Pahlavi<br />

platform caused as much trouble for him as it gained him popularity<br />

especially among the lower and middle rank ’ulama who were disillusioned<br />

with other marja’s and their collaboration with the shah’s regime. Modernity<br />

thus came to the clerical establishment with political radicalization rather<br />

than a fundamental revision of the Shi’ite legal system and reconsideration of<br />

its curriculum and judicial premises. Even prominent students of Khomeini<br />

such as Husain ’Ali Muntazari and Mutaza Mutahhari seldom called for<br />

reconsideration of the Islamic legal tradition or new teaching methods or<br />

adopting a modern legal philosophy. For them legal reform equaled<br />

succumbing to an alien secular modernity introduced by a colonizing and<br />

corrupting West.<br />

Majority of the new seminarians and clerical followers of Khomeini, came<br />

from among the underprivileged in small towns and villages. Increasingly,<br />

they were drawn in to political dissent and political activism in the late 1960s<br />

and ’70s because they resented the wealth and privilege of the secularized<br />

urban middle classes. Equally, they resented and the state’s judiciary for<br />

supplanting the old and decentralized jurists’ courts. They also questioned<br />

subservience of the Pahlavi state. Khomeini and his prominent students<br />

capitalized on these discontents to promote his leadership as superior to other<br />

leaders not necessarily because of Khomeini’s juristic qualifications, which<br />

were meager, but because of his uncompromising political stance.<br />

In the tense environment of confrontation with the shah and his police<br />

apparatus, this message of political dissent was better transmitted to the lay<br />

people by recalling the Shi’ite narratives of defiance and self-sacrifice, as in<br />

the commemoration of the martyrdom of ’Ali and that of his son, Husayn<br />

ibn ’Ali. Laboring over the obscure and mostly redundant details of Shi’ite<br />

law and the theoretical intricacies of usul al-fiqh appeared secondary if not<br />

entirely obsolete. Even Mutahhari, the most promising intellectual product of<br />

Qum in the 1970s preferred to delve into Western philosophy or Islamic<br />

reformism and revolutionary rhetoric rather than adopting a novel approach<br />

in fiqh and usul.<br />

In a climate of state-driven secular modernity versus the ’ulama’s legal<br />

redundancy, Khomeini’s gradual tilt in the 1970s toward the doctrine of<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

juridical sovereignty was the solution to the prolonged problem of<br />

unregulated leadership. He borrowed from the Sunni reformist milieu the<br />

notion of the Islamic government, long debated by the likes of Rashid Rida<br />

and later Abul ’Ala Maududi in order to set the legal ground for what he<br />

defined as the “authority of the jurist” (wilayat-i faqih). More a teacher of<br />

Greco-Islamic philosophy than a dabbler in jurisprudence, Khomeini was the<br />

right candidate to break through the inhibiting cobweb of juristic tedium.<br />

His theory had an unmistakable mystico-philosophical core that was colored<br />

by Shi’ite legal trappings. On a personal level it was the work of a reluctant<br />

jurist who was anxious to overcome his marja’ rivals through the<br />

philosophical backdoor of charismatic leadership.<br />

The concept of wilaya upon which Khomeini propounded his theory is a<br />

complex and theologically charged one. Variably read as wilaya (authority,<br />

guardianship) and walaya (patron-client bond of friendship), for Shi’ites it<br />

was the hereditary status primarily arrogated to ’Ali and his Imam<br />

descendants as true successors to the Prophet; a status of sovereignty over his<br />

true believers. In Sufism wilaya implied friendship with God, a saintly status<br />

of proximity to Truth, even according to some on par with prophecy. For<br />

the Shi’ite jurists wilaya was a purely legal term denoting the state of<br />

guardianship often assumed by the jurist over the legal minor (saghir) and<br />

mentally retarded (mahjur), hence wilaya al-faqih. Although in theory the<br />

guardianship of the jurist could be extended to the public sphere, in reality<br />

no jurist of any substance did consider as viable the jurist’s “authority to rule”<br />

(wilaya al-hukm). In the absence of the Occulted Imam, who is the just and<br />

legitimate enforcer of the wilaya, few jurists even condoned the “authority to<br />

judge” (wilaya al-qada) beyond mere issuance of fatwas, but without the<br />

necessary power to enforce them. The notion of “general deputyship” (niyaba<br />

’amma) on behalf of the Imam, as claimed by some jurists in the Safavid and<br />

early Qajar periods, was never extended to the authority to govern, though it<br />

did reserve for the jurist a certain prerogatives, such as declaring jihad under<br />

the auspices of the state.<br />

In the latter part of the 20th century however the prevalence of the idea of<br />

marja’iya seldom allowed the doctrine of collective deputyship of the<br />

mujtahids to be considered. The semantic shift in referring to the jurists also<br />

indicate a change in focus. Khomeini’s use of faqih (jurist), rather than<br />

mujtahid or marja’, in his own articulation of “guardianship” underlined<br />

sheer proficiency in fiqh rather than any acquired clerical status based on<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

vague qualifications. His wilaya, in theory at least, could be extended to any<br />

jurist and not the one that is publicly recognized as the most important<br />

marja’ or even a mujtahid. Such definition no doubt served Khomeini well<br />

while languishing in the exile of Najaf away from his constituency.<br />

As defined by Khomeini, the doctrine of the “guardianship of the jurist” was<br />

applicable to public law as well as civil law. In the absence of the Hidden<br />

Imam, he argued, the jurist presents the least oppressive form of authority<br />

because contrary to temporal rule it is founded on Islamic principles. The<br />

jurist is the most qualified in matters of law, which according to Khomeini is<br />

inherently superior to any secular body of law, and he is obliged by the same<br />

Islamic legal principals to uphold and enforce it. It is therefore incumbent<br />

upon the jurist, as an “individual duty” to strive for acquiring political<br />

authority in order to form the Islamic government. Khomeini’s doctrine was<br />

a revolutionary interpretation of the authority of the jurist even though he<br />

tried hard in his wilayat-i faqih (later Hukumat-i Islami) to fortify his theory<br />

with precedent from classical legal texts and citations from such Usulis jurists<br />

as the 19th century Mulla Ahmad Naraqi. No Shi’ite jurist before him ever<br />

extended the very limited application of legal wilaya to include public affairs,<br />

let alone, assuming of political power.<br />

Legal articulations aside, Khomeini’s doctrine was driven by the requirements<br />

of his constituency. Not only a young generation of his students and<br />

followers defied the legitimacy of the Pahlavi shah, and whatever he stood<br />

for, but they aspired coherence and unanimity within clerical ranks. The<br />

wilayat-i faqih promised not only the ascendancy of the jurists to positions of<br />

political power but a virtual end to clerical resistance to institutionalization.<br />

The rise of the wilayat-i faqih as an institution harbinger the eclipse of the<br />

marja’iya and all the ambiguity that was inherent in qualities of the mujtahid.<br />

Assuming political power by Khomeini and his ’ulama backers, which came<br />

with the revolution of 1979, inevitably imposed a bureaucratic regime on the<br />

Shi’ite ’ulama more rigid than the chaotic madrasa system of Najaf and Qum<br />

ever did. Even the honorary clerical titles, inflated over time, gained new<br />

hierarchical connotation. While ayatollah (a sign of God) applied to the<br />

higher clerical figures, the hujjat al-Islam (a proof of Islam) signified the rank<br />

below. The highest status however was Khomeini’s own. As the “guardian<br />

jurist” (wali-yi faqih) he assumed the title of imam, first time ever used in the<br />

history of Shi’ism in a context other than the twelve Imams. Although the<br />

office of guardian jurist was considered the one and the same as the “deputy<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

of the imam” (na’ib-i imam), more in vogue in the 19th century, in practice a<br />

consensus was reached on the universal and sole reference of the term imam<br />

to the founder of the Islamic Republic, hence “Imam Khomeini.”<br />

The constitutional authority and popular aura that Khomeini acquired as the<br />

guardian jurist, denoted not only a desire for rationalization of the clerical<br />

community but also a drive toward clerical absolutism. The legitimacy and<br />

the mandate of the guardian jurist does not derive from his constituency of<br />

followers, as in the case of the marja’, but from a sublime source. Despite the<br />

seemingly democratic trappings of the constitution of the Islamic Republic,<br />

the guardian jurist is answerable to no source but God, even though he is<br />

appointed by a Council of the Experts (Majlis-i Khubragan), a select body of<br />

high-ranking ’ulama (and presumably impeachable by the same body). The<br />

range of the guardian’s institutional authority is vast and universally abiding<br />

even though the Islamic Consultative Council (Majlis-i Shawra-yi Islami; i.e.,<br />

the parliament) tends to modify his ultimate power. Similarly, articles of the<br />

Constitution guaranteeing the inalienable rights and freedoms of the<br />

individual contradict with the authoritarian power of the guardian jurist.<br />

Khomeini’s charismatic aura in early years of the revolution glossed over the<br />

obvious contradiction in the constitution between democratic freedoms and<br />

the totalitarian power of the guardian jurist. In post-Khomeini era, and<br />

twenty-three years after the revolution, the contrast is glaring. The “supreme<br />

leader” (rahbar) as Khomeini’s successor, Ayatollah ’Ali Khamanei is<br />

recognized in today’s Islamic Republic, insists on these constitutional<br />

prerogatives to control, and if necessary quell, the legislative, the executive<br />

and the judicial branches of the government and remain unaccountable to<br />

any elected body.<br />

The authoritarian nature of wilayat-i faqih is indebted to the persistent<br />

culture of autocracy which the revolution denounced in theory but<br />

perpetuated in practice. But it also was reflective of the Shi’ite judicial<br />

community’s failure to rethink the precepts of the Shi’ite law and their<br />

applicability to pluralist values. The doctrine of the “guardianship of the<br />

jurist” was informed above all by a Shi’ite legal mindset that essentially was<br />

alien to the modern notions of plurality and democratic leadership even<br />

though, ironically, Shi’ite ijtihad and marja’iya operated on some form of<br />

popular representation. It was also colored, no doubt, by Khomeini’s own<br />

mystical propensity for classical Sufism and specifically Ibn ’Arabi’s theory of<br />

wilaya. Moreover, what historically informed “guardianship,” as apparent in<br />

the rhetoric of the Islamic revolution, was an imagined narrative of Islam’s<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

golden age. The modern Shi’ite narrative of ’Ali’s pristine (though historically<br />

doomed) caliphate placed great moral emphasis on leadership qualities of<br />

compassion (walaya) and self-denial (ithar) essential for creating a “classless”<br />

society. Added to the admixture that concocted the “guardianship of the<br />

jurist” also was the modern revolutionary urgency for assertive leadership<br />

harking back to the French age of “terror” and the Russian “dictatorship of<br />

the proletariat.” Such presuppositions were barely conducive to a progressive<br />

legal framework that separates legal authority from political power and<br />

religion from the state. What profoundly was missing in this politico-legal<br />

vision of absolute leadership was a desire for re-examining the long-held<br />

precepts of Islamic law in a new light of historical relativity.<br />

As for the clerical community, in the two decades since the Islamic revolution<br />

it has allowed itself to be largely incorporated into the Islamic regime and<br />

actively sought to monopolize positions of power. A minority of the jurists<br />

remained critical of the theory and the implementation of leadership and<br />

faced the dire consequences of their criticisms. The rising opposition to<br />

wilayat-i faqih on the other hand unified the pro-regime clerics behind the<br />

doctrine and solidified the clerical hierarchy to an unprecedented degree. The<br />

Shi’ite establishment more than ever appears to be an equivalent of a statesponsored<br />

church with its ecclesiastical hierarchy, perhaps, as Said Arjomand<br />

observed, comparable to the Weberian “cesaro-papist” model of the state.<br />

The concentration of power in the hand of an oligarchy consisting of the<br />

guardian jurist and his top echelons of clerical allies, inevitably triggered<br />

much resentment. The laymen and laywomen of younger generation with<br />

revolutionary credentials now feel they have been left out by a clerical<br />

establishment that resorts to repression to preserve its privileges and<br />

monopolies.<br />

The anti-clerical content of Aghajari’s speech and his call for an Islamic<br />

Reformation originates in this pool of anti-clerical resentment. Younger<br />

Iranians are frustrated with the monopoly of power, heavy-handed treatment<br />

of dissident voices, and obscurantist legal outlook. They also are disillusioned<br />

with repeated setbacks of the seemingly pro-reform wing of the clerical<br />

establishment as represented by President Muhammad Khatami and his<br />

moderate clerical supporters. Such calls for reforming Islam are by no means<br />

rare in the history of antinomean Islam. Yet what distinguishes this postrevolutionary<br />

episode from earlier examples is that this movement of protest,<br />

especially since Khomeini’s death in 1989, aimed at a consolidated clerical<br />

hierarchy with claim to infallible and comprehensive authority. The<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Abbas Amanat<br />

guardianship of jurist is a far more explicit a claim over religious hegemony in<br />

public sphere and on behalf of the Imams than the old marja’iya ever was.<br />

This is what makes the new criticism especially potent and enduring.<br />

As for Aghajari’s fate, he seems to have been the involuntary beneficiary of<br />

the inconsistencies that are typical of Shi`ite legal practice. The same ruling<br />

of the <strong>Hamad</strong>an court that sentenced him to death for blasphemy also<br />

sentenced him to a total of eight years of imprisonment for three other<br />

related counts and after that to ten years of ban from teaching in any<br />

university. The court does not clarify whether the death sentence should be<br />

carried before or after eighteen years of incarceration and banishment from<br />

classroom. The seemingly ludicrous verdict of the court points to the<br />

ambiguities of a legal culture built on negotiation and compromise, a culture<br />

that still seems to be thriving more that two decades of Islamic<br />

revolutionizing.<br />

Notes<br />

1 Aqajari: Matn-i kamel-i sokhanrani-yi <strong>Hamad</strong>an, etc. (Tehran, 1382/2003),<br />

p. 36.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


P<br />

Stanley Aronowitz<br />

A Mills Revival?<br />

by<br />

Stanley Aronowitz<br />

Prologue<br />

erhaps you know Foucault’s remark that despite the torrent of criticism<br />

directed against his philosophical system, “Hegel prowls through the<br />

twentieth century.” Consigned to a kind of academic purgatory for the last<br />

three decades of the twentieth century, at a time when social theory had<br />

migrated from the social sciences obsessed with case studies and social<br />

“problems” to literature and philosophy where he was rarely discussed and<br />

almost never cited., C. Wright Mills was an absent presence. All sociologists,<br />

and most people in other social scientific disciplines knew his name, and in<br />

their political unconscious, recognized his salience, but were deterred by fear<br />

and careerism from following his path as a public political intellectual. Yet in<br />

the wake of scandals involving leading corporations and their Chief Executive<br />

and Financial Officers, which have become daily fare even in mainstream<br />

media, and the hegemony of corporate capital over the American state, which<br />

was widely reported in the press and television with unembarrassed<br />

approbation, Mills’s work is experiencing a small but pronounced revival.<br />

Although his name rarely appears on the reading lists of fashionable graduate<br />

courses in social and cultural theory, the republication of four of his major<br />

books, with new introductions by the historian Nelson Lichtenstein (New<br />

Men of Power), the social critic Russell Jacoby (White Collar) political theorist<br />

Alan Wolfe (The Power Elite), and sociologist Todd Gitlin (The Sociological<br />

Imagination) is likely to aid in exposing his work to students and younger<br />

faculty.<br />

For some, Mills does not qualify in this era when social and cultural theory is<br />

dominated by European influences. Except for his dissertation Sociology and<br />

Pragmatism, he rarely engaged in philosophical speculation; more to the point<br />

apart from some essays, in only one major instance, Character and Social<br />

Structure, did he address the “meta” questions such as method or the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

underlying presuppositions of theorizing. Marxists criticize the lack, even<br />

disdain of “class analysis” in his work; indeed the commentaries in his<br />

collection of annotated readings, The Marxists constitute both an appreciation<br />

and an unsystematic critique of Marx and Marxism. And social historians,<br />

most of them informed by class and class struggle, object to his focus on the<br />

study of élites rather than popular expressions from below, even within social<br />

movements.<br />

Yet Mills remains a model for those who wish to become intellectuals: by the<br />

evidence of his massive output in the twenty-three years of publications he was<br />

the antithesis of the specialist or the expert. When most in the human sciences<br />

followed the path of least resistance by writing the same articles and books<br />

over and over, Mills ranged widely over historical cultural, political, social, and<br />

psychological domains. He was interested in the labor and radical movements<br />

and wrote extensively on them; as a close student of Max Weber he made<br />

some of the most trenchant critiques of bureaucracy; he was among the leading<br />

post-war critics of the emergent mass culture and the mass communications<br />

media and, despite its ostensibly introductory tone, The Sociological<br />

Imagination may be America’s best contribution to the ongoing debate about<br />

the relationship of scholarship to social commitment, a debate which has<br />

animated literary as well as social science circles for decades.<br />

His literary executor and biographer, Irving Louis Horowitz, turned against<br />

him, for the most part, so the biography tells us more about the author than<br />

about Mills. Other book-length treatments are sympathetic but limited, and<br />

to a large extent, dated. With the partial exception of some excellent<br />

dissertations and master’s theses, notably Tom Hayden’s insightful Radical<br />

Nomad more than forty years after his death, Mills awaits a major critical<br />

study, let alone a full-length biography.<br />

We may speculate that among putative readers his contemporanity, the sharp<br />

focus on the United States and its traditions and, most of all, his annoying<br />

habit of writing plainly (substituting vernacular expressions for scientific terms)<br />

turned away some who can only respect writers who invent neologisms and<br />

whose simple thoughts require complex syntax. But at a moment when these<br />

fashions have lost some of their luster, those who yearn for substance as well as<br />

style may return with pleasure to the dark ruminations of C. Wright Mills.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003<br />

I<br />

C. Wright Mills is exemplary of a vanishing breed in American life: the public<br />

political intellectual who, despite his grating message, often received a hearing<br />

in mainstream media. For almost fifteen years, beginning with the publication<br />

of The New Men of Power in 1948 and ending with his untimely death, at age<br />

forty six, in 1962, Mills was among America’s best known social scientists and<br />

social critics. During the late 1940s and 1950s he published three books that<br />

constitute a theory and description of the post-World War II American social<br />

structure. His Sociological Imagination remains widely read in college<br />

classrooms, both for its attempt to provide a socially-committed introduction<br />

to the discipline, and its fierce critique of the prevailing tendencies in American<br />

sociology, what Mills calls “Grand Theory” and “Abstracted Empiricism.” The<br />

grand theorist’s scope is much too wide to yield practical and theoretical<br />

insight. And Mills criticizes the legions of Abstracted Empiricists who, in the<br />

service of incrementally accumulated verifiable scientific knowledge, confine<br />

themselves to producing small-scale investigations. Together with his<br />

collaborator and mentor, Hans Gerth, he edited one of the earliest and best<br />

collections in English translation of Max Weber’s essays. And Character and<br />

Social Structure (1954), written with Gerth, an unjustly neglected work, may<br />

be considered Mills’s premier work of social theory. This book elaborates what<br />

I claim was the “scaffolding” upon which he hung his major works of middle<br />

range theory, especially the triology. In fact, it is difficult to fully comprehend<br />

the harsh critiques of Sociological Imagination, and Mills’s method, without the<br />

elaborated theoretical framework of Character.<br />

While not exactly a household name, he was widely known among the<br />

politically active population and wide circles of academic and independent<br />

intellectuals. Unlike many public intellectuals he was neither a servant nor a<br />

supplicant of power but, in the sense of the 17th century English radical, was a<br />

“ranter”; in American terms, he was a Paul Revere whose job it was to sound<br />

the alarm. Indeed, some of his writings recall the pamphlets of the decades of<br />

the American revolution where the address of numerous and often anonymous<br />

writers was to the “publick” of small farmers and artisans, as much as to those<br />

holding political and economic power. Much of his later writing may be


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

compared to turn of the 20th century populist and socialist pamphleteers<br />

whose aim was to simultaneously educate and arouse workers and farmers to<br />

the evils of corporate power.<br />

Yet in his most fertile period of intellectual work, the decade and a half ending<br />

with the publication of The Sociological Imagination (1959), with the possible<br />

exception of The Power Elite, Mills hardly expected to reach a popular, let<br />

alone mass public. Nevertheless, he always attempted to reach out to a wider<br />

public than did his fellow academics, even when he was formulating new<br />

theories, let alone engaging in public criticism. But Mills’s intention is entirely<br />

subversive of contemporary mainstream social science, especially the notion<br />

that intellectuals should remain neutral observers of economic, political and<br />

social life. While he performed his fair share of funded research—notably his<br />

study of Puerto Rico and the collective portraits of characteristic social types—<br />

most of his writing is addressed to potential and actual political publics.<br />

Following Marx and Weber, who at the end of his life was a major contributor<br />

in shaping the moral and legal framework of the Weimar Republic, Mills held<br />

that intellectuals and their ideas were embedded in the social antagonisms and<br />

struggles of their own time; they bring to their analysis a definite standpoint,<br />

whether or not they are prepared to acknowledge it.<br />

Yet Mills adhered to none of the mainstream parties nor to those on the<br />

fringes of mainstream politics. While he was a figure of his own time (his main<br />

work was done in the 1940s and 1950s, when issues of sex, gender and ecology<br />

were barely blips on the screen), his position was congenitally critical—of the<br />

right, conservatives, liberals, the relatively tiny parties of the left and especially<br />

members of his own shrinking group, the independent leftists. Like one of his<br />

heroes, the economist and social theorist Thorstein Veblen, himself a pariah in<br />

his chosen discipline, to paraphrase a famous aphorism of Marx, Mills was “in<br />

but not of” the academy insofar as he refuses the distinction between<br />

scholarship and partisanship. But, unlike Veblen, whose alienation from<br />

conventional economics was almost total, Mills was, for most of his<br />

professional career, a sociologist in his heart as much as his mind The rhetoric<br />

and the methods embodied in his books on American social structure—The<br />

New Men of Power, White Collar, and The Power Elite—are firmly rooted in<br />

the perspectives of mainstream American sociology at the end of the war.<br />

These perspectives owed as much to the methodological precepts of Emile<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

Durkheim as they did to the critical theory of Karl Marx and Max Weber.<br />

Using many of the tools of conventional social inquiry: surveys, interviews,<br />

data analysis—charts included—Mills takes pains to stay close to the “data”<br />

until the concluding chapters.<br />

But what distinguishes Mills from mainstream sociology, and from Weber,<br />

with whom he shares a considerable portion of his intellectual outlook, is the<br />

standpoint of radical social change, not of fashionable sociological neutrality.<br />

At the height of the Cold War and in the midst of the so-called McCarthy era,<br />

he fearlessly named capitalism as the system of domination from within one of<br />

its intellectual bastions, Columbia University, and distanced himself from exradicals<br />

among his colleagues who were busy “choosing the west,” otherwise<br />

giving aid and comfort to the witch-hunters, or neutering themselves by hiding<br />

behind the ideology of value-free scholarship. Anti-Stalinist to the core, toward<br />

the end of his life he was, nevertheless, accused of pro-Communist sympathies<br />

for his unsparing criticism of the militarization of America and his spirited<br />

defense of the Cuban revolution.<br />

In the light of his later writings which, to say the least, held out little hope for<br />

radical social change in the United States The New Men of Power, Mills’s first<br />

major work, occupies a singular place in the Mills corpus. Written on the heels<br />

of the veritable general strike of industrial workers in 1946, and the<br />

conservative counterattack the following year embedded in the Taft-Hartley<br />

amendments to the Labor Relations Act, the study of America’s labor leaders<br />

argues that for the first time in history the labor movement, having shown its<br />

capacity to shape the political economy, possessed the practical requisites to<br />

become a major actor in American politics as well. But as both “as army<br />

general and a contractor of labor,” a “machine politician” and the head of a<br />

“social movement,” the labor leader occupies contradictory space. (Mills,<br />

1948) By 1948, the year of publication of the first edition of The New Men of<br />

Power, buoyed by American capitalism’s unparalleled global dominance, a<br />

powerful conservative force was arrayed against labor’s recently acquired power<br />

and, according to Mills, had no intention of yielding more ground without an<br />

all-out industrial and political war. Yet, he found union leaders curiously<br />

unprepared for the struggle. Even as their cause was being abandoned by liberal<br />

allies, and belittled and besmirched by their natural enemies among the<br />

corporations and their ideological mouthpieces, right-wing intellectuals and<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

conservative politicians, union leaders remained faithful to the Democratic<br />

party and to the New Deal, which was rapidly fading into history. Mills and<br />

his collaborator, Helen Schneider, found that the concept that working people<br />

needed a labor party to truly represent their political interests had declined<br />

from the perspective of most labor leaders whereas a decade earlier, the apex of<br />

industrial unionism, a majority favored the formation of such a party, despite<br />

their expedient support of the Democrats.<br />

You might say that Mills’s notion of power owes much to Machiavelli’s The<br />

Prince. Just as Machiavelli reminds the prince that the old rules of the feudal<br />

oligarchy no longer suffice to retain power but that a public has formed which<br />

intends to call the ruler to account for his actions, in his book on the labor<br />

leaders Mills is, at first, in dialogue with a leadership increasingly attracted to<br />

oligarchical rule, and to the liberal center and whose love affair with established<br />

power has lasted to this day. His study admonishes the labor leadership to<br />

attend to the post-war shift that endangers theirs and their members’ power.<br />

Arguing that the “main drift” is away from the collaboration between business<br />

and labor made necessary and viable by the war he suggests that labor leaders of<br />

“great stature” must come to the fore before labor is reduced. “Now there is no<br />

war,” but there is a powerful war machine and conservative reaction against<br />

labor’s power at the bargaining table.<br />

“Today, knit together as they are by trade associations, the corporations<br />

steadily translate economic strength into effective and united political power.<br />

The power of the federal state has increased enormously. The state is now so<br />

big in the economy, and the power of business is so great in the state, that<br />

unions can no longer seriously expect even the traditional short-run economic<br />

gains without considering the conditions under which their demands are<br />

politically realizable.” Top down rule, which implies keeping the membership<br />

at bay is, according to Mills, inadequate to the new situation where a militaryindustrial<br />

alliance was emerging, among whose aims was to weaken and<br />

otherwise destroy the labor movement.<br />

How to combat this drift? Mills forthrightly suggests that the labor leader<br />

become the basis for the formation of a “new power bloc.” Rather than make<br />

deals on the top with powerful interests, “he will have to accumulate power<br />

from the bottom. . . . If the democratic power of members is to be used<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

against the concentrated power of money, it must in some way create its own<br />

political force . . . the left would create an independent labor party” based on<br />

labor’s formidable economic strength. At the same time, Mills argues, it must<br />

enlarge its own base to include the “underdogs”—few of whom are in the<br />

unions. By underdogs Mills does not mean those at the very bottom. They<br />

are, in his view, too habituated to “submission.” He means the working poor,<br />

the unskilled who were largely left out of the great organizing wave of the<br />

1930s and the war years. And he calls for the organization of elements of the<br />

new middle class and the rapidly growing white collar strata whose potential<br />

power, he argues, will remain unrealized unless they are organized.<br />

One may read the New Men of Power with a number of pairs of eyes. At<br />

minimum it can be read as a stimulating account of the problems and<br />

prospects facing post-World War II American labor. It is descriptively<br />

comprehensive of the state of organized labor and the obstacles which it faced<br />

in this period. If Mills was mistaken to believe that unions would have to<br />

become an independent political force to meet the elementary economic<br />

demands of their memberships, it may be argued that this limitation applies<br />

only to the first three decades after the war. Unions did deliver, and in some<br />

cases handsomely, to a substantial minority of the American working class.<br />

They organized neither the “underdogs” nor the new middle class and white<br />

collar clerical, technical and professional workers who were all but ignored by<br />

the postwar labor movement, but forged a new social compact with large<br />

employers for their own members. For a third of the labor force in unions,<br />

and a much larger percentage of industrial workers, they succeeded in<br />

negotiating what may be called a “private” welfare state, huge advances in their<br />

members’ standard of living and a high degree of job security and individual<br />

protection against arbitrary discharge and other forms of discipline.<br />

Ironically, this book is far more accurate in its central prognostication of<br />

labor’s decline for the years since 1973. Labor has paid a steep price for its<br />

refusal to heed Mills’s admonition to forge its own power bloc. Buffeted by<br />

economic globalization, corporate mergers and the deindustrialization of vast<br />

areas of the northeast and midwest and by the growth of the largely non-union<br />

south as the industrial investment of choice, many unions have despaired of<br />

making new gains and are hanging on to their declining memberships for dear<br />

life. Labor is, perhaps irreversibly, on the defensive. In this period, union<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

density—the proportion of union members to the work force—has been cut<br />

in half. Collective bargaining stills occurs regularly in unionized industries and<br />

occupations and employers still sign contracts. But the last two decades are<br />

marked by labor’s steady retreat from hard-won gains. In many instances,<br />

collective bargaining as yielded to collective begging.<br />

Corporations and their political allies have succeeded in rolling back one of the<br />

most important features of the New Deal-era reforms, the provision of a<br />

minimum income for the long-term unemployed (pejoratively coded as<br />

“welfare” by post-New Deal politicians). Many who still collect checks are<br />

forced to work in public and private agencies for minimum wages, in some<br />

states replacing union labor. Social Security is on the block and privatization of<br />

public goods, especially schools and health care facilities, seems to be the longterm<br />

program of conservatives and many in the liberal center.<br />

Mills recognizes, as few labor leaders do, the importance of reaching out to the<br />

various publics that frame the political landscape. During the era of the social<br />

compact, union leaders saw little value in taking labor’s case to the public<br />

either during strikes or important legislative campaigns. As junior partners of<br />

the power élite they were often advised to keep conflicts in the “family” and<br />

rely on lobbying, influence with leading politicians through electoral support,<br />

and other traditionally élite tactics to achieve their goals. Labor leaders would<br />

rarely divulge the issues in union negotiations and during the final stages of<br />

bargaining because they agreed to a press blackout. Only as an act of<br />

desperation, when an organizing drive or a strike was in its losing stage, did<br />

some unions make public statements. Following Mills’s advice, one might<br />

argue, especially for public employees unions and unions in major national<br />

corporations, the public is always the third party at the bargaining table and the<br />

struggle to win it over has generally be won by management.<br />

The ambiguity comes in when the subsequent writings are considered.<br />

Discouraged by the labor movement’s inability to reverse or halt the<br />

reactionary legislative and political offensive, by the early 1950s Mills had<br />

abandoned hope that the labor movement was capable of stemming the tide of<br />

almost complete corporate capitalist domination of economic, political and<br />

cultural life. Discussion of the labor movement’s social weight is largely absent<br />

from White Collar, published in 1951, only three years after The New Men of<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

Power. The Power Elite, which appeared in 1956, more or less permanently<br />

consigns organized labor to a subordinate status within the pantheon of<br />

national power. In Mills’s view the moment had come and gone when unions<br />

could even conceive of making a qualitative difference in power arrangements.<br />

Whereas in 1948, Mills’s address was chiefly to the labor leaders themselves—<br />

it was both a careful sociological portrait of these new men of power and an<br />

attempted dialogue with them—the subsequent works do not have a specific<br />

labor public in mind.<br />

It was the theory of mass society, a concept that spans radical and conservative<br />

critiques of late capitalism, that informed Mills’s later pessimism. Mills was a<br />

leading figure in the sociology of “mass” culture and mass society which<br />

developed along several highly visible lines in the 1940s and 1950s. He<br />

observed the increasing homogenization of American culture and brilliantly<br />

linked some of its more egregious features to the decline of the democratic<br />

public. While his rhetoric was distinctly in the American vein, his views<br />

paralleled, and were crucially influenced by, those of Theodore Adorno, Max<br />

Horkheimer and Herbert Marcuse, the leading theorists of the Frankfurt<br />

school. While there is little evidence that he was similarly impressed by<br />

psychoanalysis, like them he linked cultural massification to mounting<br />

political conformity associated with the emergence of fascism and other<br />

authoritarian movements in nearly all advanced industrial societies.<br />

This pioneering study of the emergence of the middle class of salaried<br />

professional, technical and clerical employees situates the spread of mass culture<br />

after World War I to their growing significance in advanced industrial societies.<br />

Consistent with his emerging obsession with questions of political and social<br />

power and of the prospects for radical social transformation, White Collar may<br />

be read as an assessment not only of the occupational situation of the various<br />

strata of the middle class in the manner of traditional sociological analysis, but<br />

of the social psychology of what Mills terms the “new” middle class—the<br />

rapidly growing strata of salaried professional, technical and administrative<br />

employees—many of them working in large corporations. The book opens<br />

with an obituary of the “old” middle class—farmers, small merchants and<br />

manufacturers—perhaps the leading class of the 18th and first half of 19th<br />

century. The transformation of property from a welter of small independent<br />

producers and merchants to large concentrations of capital which marked the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

second half of the 19th century reduced the economic and political influence<br />

of the old middle class to the middle levels of power, mostly in local<br />

communities. The functions of administration, sales and distribution grew<br />

faster than manufacturing, but even in production industries the traditional<br />

blue collar industrial work force expanded more slowly than the bureaucracies<br />

of the various strata of white collar employees.<br />

By World War I, the oligopolistic corporations in basic industries such as steel<br />

and energy, and large light-manufacturing industries such as textiles and<br />

durable consumer goods, banking and insurance, and wholesaling and retail<br />

enterprises, were hiring huge armies of clerical employees and sales personnel,<br />

and smaller but important coteries of engineers, technicians and managers, the<br />

latter growing numerically with the decline of the family owned and operated<br />

firm. To be sure the small firm has survived, according to Mills, but small<br />

business of all types is increasingly unstable:<br />

Nationally, the small businessman is overpowered, politically<br />

and economically, by big business; he therefore tries to ride<br />

with and benefit from the success of big business on the<br />

national political front, even as he fights the economic effects<br />

of big business on the local and state front. (Mills 1951, 51)<br />

Small entrepreneurs go in and out of business, their chance of survival<br />

diminishing with the growth and scope of large scale enterprises: grocery<br />

chains, department stores and large manufacturing corporations all of which<br />

are able to benefit from economies of scale and ample supplies of capital with<br />

which to invest in technological innovation to drive prices down and their<br />

small business competitors out of the marketplace.<br />

Among the diverse strata of the new middle class the managers, according to<br />

Mills, occupy a unique place. The “managerial demiurge” signifies a new form<br />

of power, and not only at the workplace. Their numbers are growing rapidly<br />

and, to the degree they run corporate and government bureaucracies, “the<br />

managerial type of man becomes more important in the total social structure.”<br />

(Mills 1951, 77) While the top managers are given the task of controlling the<br />

underlying population, at every level of economic, political and cultural<br />

activity—middle managers, supervisors and line foreman, as well—the job of<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

coordination and of control expands with the complexity of the occupational<br />

structure and the manifold problems associated with advanced capitalism.<br />

Mills accepts the idea, first advanced by Berle and Means in the classic Modern<br />

Corporation and Private Property, that advanced capitalist societies are marked<br />

by the separation of ownership and control in the everyday functions of the<br />

large corporate enterprise, the owner has gradually handed more power to the<br />

manager. In turn, government and private corporations are run as rationalized<br />

bureaucracies rather than in the image of the individual corporate tycoon of the<br />

late 19th century who ran his business like an old fashioned sovereign.<br />

Although little more than elevated wage workers and, for this reason, deprived<br />

by their subordination to management, of the work autonomy enjoyed by the<br />

“old” middle class, the salaried professional and technical strata remain<br />

culturally tied to capital. Mills saw little hope for their unionization as long as<br />

mass culture—their indigenous culture—was the “the main drift” of mass<br />

society. On the one hand, reared in images of American exceptionalism, they<br />

were the embodiments of the cultural aspiration for individual social mobility;<br />

on the other, their growth was accompanied by the proletarianization of<br />

professional and technical strata, proletarian because they neither owned their<br />

own productive property nor controlled their labor. Some may earn higher<br />

salaries than industrial workers but, in contrast to unionized workers who have<br />

the protection of a collective bargaining agreement limiting management’s<br />

rights, they were subordinated to arbitrary managerial authority in the<br />

performance of their tasks. Yet, their eyes were fixed on the stars. Lacking a<br />

secure class identity which is intrinsic to those engaged in the production and<br />

appropriation of things, as producers of “symbols” they were likely to remain<br />

an atomized mass, an oxymoron which signified what Erik Olin Wright later<br />

described as the “contradictory class location” into which they were thrust. As<br />

for the clerical and administrative employees they were cogs in the vast<br />

machinery of the “enormous file”; they were keepers of information and of the<br />

proliferating records accumulated by the growing significance of sales. (Mills<br />

1951 189-214)<br />

In the absence of social movements capable of making a genuine difference in<br />

power relations, these studies are directed to the general, largely “liberal center”<br />

for whom Mills never ceased to have mixed feelings. The liberals were a<br />

necessary ingredient of any possible grand coalition for social change, but this<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

center was marked by “looseness of its ideas,” an attribute which led it to<br />

“dissipate their political attention and activity.” Yet, in the wake of the failure<br />

of the labor leaders to face the challenge posed by the rightward drift of<br />

American politics, the hardening of corporate resistance to labor’s economic<br />

demands, the freezing of the political environment by the cold war and the<br />

virtual disappearance of the left, especially the independent left, until the late<br />

1950s Mills’s public address shifted decisively to the center, even as his<br />

political position remained firmly on the independent, non-communist left.<br />

The central category which suffuses Mills’ social thought and to which he<br />

returned again and again was that of power, especially the mechanisms by<br />

which it is achieved and retained by élites in the economy and social<br />

institutions. This is the signal contribution of the Italian social theorists<br />

Gaetano Mosca and Vilfredo Pareto to Mills’s conceptual arsenal. In Pareto’s<br />

conception, élites, not classes, constitute the nexus of social rule. To derive his<br />

conception of power, Mills focuses neither on the labor process, the starting<br />

point for Marxists, nor on the market, the economic focus for Weberians. In<br />

contrast, Mills is a state theorist: élites are, for Mills, always institutionally<br />

constituted. He recognized the relative autonomy of corporations but<br />

consistent with the regulation era of advanced capitalism, he argued that the<br />

state had become the fundamental location of the exercise of economic, as<br />

much as political power. So, for example, in The Power Elite, his most famous<br />

and influential work, three “institutional orders” which are closely linked but<br />

spatially and historically independent—the corporate, the political and the<br />

military—constitute together what others might, in Marxist vocabulary,<br />

describe as a ruling class. Except it isn’t a “class” either in the sense of those<br />

who share a common relationship to the ownership and control of productive<br />

property or, as in Max Weber’s conception, groups that share a common<br />

interest in gaining access to market opportunities for employment and to<br />

acquire goods. The power élite is an alliance of the individuals who compose<br />

top layers of each of the crucial institutional orders and whose relative strength<br />

varies according to historical circumstances.<br />

In the immediate post-World War II period, Mills detects the autonomous<br />

power of the military as, increasingly, the driving force in the alliance, just as<br />

the political élite occupied that position during the 1930s slump, when the<br />

provision of social welfare attained an urgency, lest by neglecting the needs of<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

the underlying population, the system might be endangered. The military, as a<br />

relatively autonomous power center, gained sustenance from the rearmament<br />

program leading to World War II but since there was no peace after 1945, it<br />

retained its central position in the power structure. Almost immediately the<br />

United States and the Soviet Union, the two remaining superpowers, were<br />

engaged in a new “cold” war in which nuclear and conventional weapons<br />

played an enormous economic as well as political role in world and domestic<br />

politics. And the cold aspects of the war were punctuated by discontinuous,<br />

but frequent, “hot” wars such as those in Korea, Southeast Asia, China, and<br />

Israel. Under these circumstances, the military, allying itself with those large<br />

corporations engaged in defense production, accumulated substantial<br />

independent power. Needless to say, the corporations, the holders of what he<br />

calls “big money,” are by no means ignored. After all, they remain the<br />

backbone of the entire system.<br />

But in his analysis of the commanding heights, Mills is not content to describe<br />

the three institutional orders that comprise the power élite. He shows that the<br />

scope of its power embraces wide sections upon which the legitimacy of<br />

American society depends. Chief among them are the celebrities who, as the<br />

premier ornaments of mass society, are routinely recruited to lend prestige to<br />

the high officials of the three principal institutions of power. Political parties<br />

and their candidates eagerly showcase celebrities who support them; corporate<br />

executives regularly mingle with celebrities in Hollywood and New York at<br />

exclusive clubs and parties; and “warlords”—high military officers, corporate<br />

officials, their scientists and technologists engaged in perfecting more lethal<br />

weapons of mass destruction, the politicians responsible for executive and<br />

congressional approval of military budgets—congregate in many of the same<br />

social and cultural spaces as well as in the business suites of warfare. In short,<br />

following the muckraking tradition, but also international sociological<br />

discourse on power, The Power Elite uses the evidentiary method first<br />

perfected by the independent scholars such as Ferdinand Lundberg of tracing<br />

interlocking networks of social and cultural association as much as business<br />

relationship to establish the boundaries and contour of power. Moreover, in<br />

this work we can see the movement of individuals among the leading<br />

institutional orders that constitute the nexus of power, so that their difference<br />

tends to blur.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

Naming the power élite as the only “independent variable” in American<br />

society, Mills was obliged to revise his earlier estimation of the labor<br />

movement. Barely eight years after designating the labor leaders “new men of<br />

power” who had to choose whether to lead the entire society in the name of<br />

working people and other subordinate groups he designated them a<br />

“dependent variable” in the political economy. Accordingly, he lost hope that,<br />

in any possible practical eventuality, working people and their unions would<br />

enter the historical stage as autonomous actors, at least until a powerful new<br />

left of intellectuals and other oppressed groups emerged to push them.<br />

Mills’s identification of power with the triumvirate of corporation, military<br />

and national state, was offered in the same period that political theorists and<br />

sociologists were proclaiming the concept of pluralism as a more accurate<br />

description. Robert Dahl’s Who Governs, a study of the city of New Haven’s<br />

power structure, construed power in the metaphor of a parallelogram of forces,<br />

none of which dominated political decision-making. Business, labor, consumer<br />

groups such as parent associations, taxpayers and other organized groups<br />

constituted power relationships through the mechanisms of compromise and<br />

consensus. Although not denying that big business and the political directorate<br />

exhibited oligarchic tendencies, Dahl vehemently refuted the concepts<br />

associated with both Marxism and élite theory that there were clearly<br />

articulated ruling groups that were the only genuine independent force. Dahl’s<br />

study became not only a model for the understanding of local power, but of<br />

national power as well. As persuasive as Mills’s argument may have been for<br />

progressives and other political skeptics, his views were subject to the severe<br />

criticism of many of his fellow academics as well as reviewers. For some he had<br />

failed to appreciate the resilience of American democracy, was importing ideas<br />

inherited from the non-applicable European context to American<br />

circumstances and, in any case, had offered yet another exercise in debunking.<br />

II<br />

HE DID HIS GRADUATE WORK AT Wisconsin under the mentorship of, among<br />

others, Hans Gerth, whose powerful mind was never matched by a body of<br />

equally compelling written work. In some respects, Mills gave an English<br />

language voice to Gerth’s ideas (although the collaboration has lately been<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

subject to critical scrutiny by some scholars who contend that Mills took<br />

advantage of Gerth). These ideas—a complex synthesis of Marx, Max Weber,<br />

Gaetano Mosca and Vilfedo Pareto—introduced a wide range of concepts into<br />

the study of modern institutional life. Crucial to Gerth and Mills’s<br />

understanding of how modern institutions work was Weber’s theory of<br />

bureaucracy, read through the pejorative connotation of its system of rules and<br />

occupational hierarchies as inimical to democratic decision-making. Rather<br />

than viewing bureaucracies as necessary institutions to make complex industrial<br />

societies work more efficiently as Weber argued, Gerth also provided Mills<br />

with the idea that bureaucratic control of institutions entailed domination,<br />

which Robert Michels extended to socialist organizations in his classic, Political<br />

Parties. For Michels the mechanism of domination was the leadership’s<br />

monopoly over the means of communication. Mills sees the development of<br />

the state, no less than the labor movement as a series of highly institutionalized<br />

bureaucracies which, in contrast to his preferred model of unions—voluntary,<br />

democratically run and rank and file controlled organizations—were rapidly<br />

mutating into oligarchies of power.<br />

Mills’s dissertation, Sociology and Pragmatism, completed in 1943, was an<br />

explicit attempt to draw the implications of European sociological theory for<br />

the United States. He himself exemplified that connection. For pragmatism<br />

there is no question of intrinsic “truth” if by that term we designate the<br />

possibility that truth may be independent of the context within which a<br />

proposition about the social world is uttered. The truth of a proposition is<br />

closely tied to the practical consequences that might, under specific conditions,<br />

issue from it. And practical consequences may be evaluated only from the<br />

perspective of social interest. But, unlike John Dewey’s concept, there is no<br />

“win-win” thinking here. In the end, Mills adhered to the notion that whether<br />

a particular power arrangement was desirable depended on whose ox was being<br />

gored.<br />

Mills drew heavily upon Karl Mannheim’s concept of ideology, but also<br />

adopted his lifelong preoccupation with the intellectuals whom Mannheim<br />

designated as the only social formation capable of independent thought and<br />

action.. Mannheim’s major work Ideology and Utopia is a critique of the<br />

Marxist designation of the proletariat as a universal class and, particularly of<br />

Georg Lukács’s argument that having adopted the standpoint of the proletariat<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

which, in relation to knowledge, has no interest in reproducing the<br />

mystifications which buttress bourgeois rule. According to Lukács, Marxism<br />

can penetrate the veil of reified social relations to reveal the laws of motion of<br />

capitalism and, therefore, produce a truthful account of how society works.<br />

Mills was much too skeptical to buy into this formulation; Mannheim’s<br />

relativism—that “standpoint” thinking inevitably led to partial knowledge—<br />

was more attractive and corresponded to his own pragmatic vision.<br />

Accordingly, knowledge is always infused with interest, even if it occurs behind<br />

the backs of actors. But Mills leans toward ideology as an expression of<br />

intentionality and this characterization is particularly applied to the labor<br />

leaders who are the subjects of The New Men of Power, and the business élite<br />

described in an essay republished in the collected essays, Power Politics and<br />

People and later incorporated in The Power Elite. Lacking an explicit ideology<br />

does not mean that labor or corporate leader can dispense with the tools of<br />

persuasion. But according to Mills, these are the tools of a “practical politician”<br />

rather than that of an ideologue. Thus, Mills’s employment of the word<br />

“rhetoric” to describe how leaders persuade and otherwise justify their<br />

constituencies of policies and programs that may or may not be in their<br />

interest.<br />

Mills was also a close reader of the political and social thought of John Dewey,<br />

perhaps America’s preeminent philosopher of the first half of the 20th century<br />

and one of the leading figures in the development of pragmatism. From<br />

Dewey and from his interlocutor, Walter Lippmann, whose debate with<br />

Dewey on whether there was a chance for a genuine democratic society and<br />

governance in an America increasingly dominated by experts, was among the<br />

most important intellectual events of the 1920s. Mills derived the concept of<br />

the “public” or, in his usage, “publics” from this controversy. By the time<br />

Lippmann’s Public Opinion (1921) appeared, many intellectuals expressed<br />

doubts that the ideal of the public as the foundation of a democratic polity,<br />

which made decisions as well as conferring consent, was at all possible in the<br />

wake of the emergence of mass society with its mass publics and massified<br />

culture.<br />

Lippmann argued, persuasively to many, that a public of independent-minded<br />

individuals was, by the end of World War I, decisively foreclosed by the<br />

complexity of international relations, by advanced technology, the reduction of<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

genuine knowledge from which to adduce opinion to slogans by the mass<br />

media, and the growing role of the state. For a society of citizens, in the sense<br />

of the Greek city-state, who are capable of making the vital decisions affecting<br />

the polity, he held out no hope. Given the conditions for its formation, the<br />

public was shortsighted, prejudiced and, most of all, chronically ill-informed.<br />

While defending the claim that the élite of experts, which came into its own<br />

with the consolidation of the modern state and the modern corporation, was<br />

as desirable as it was inevitable in complex societies, Lippmann retained a trace<br />

of his former socialist skepticism. He wanted a democratic public to force<br />

experts and political leaders to obtain consent on a regular basis and, through<br />

the ballot, to pass judgement on their quasi-sovereign actions. Thus,<br />

democracy was conceived purely negatively, as the barrier against authoritarian,<br />

technocratic rule.<br />

Deeply affected by this powerful argument against participatory democracy,<br />

John Dewey was moved to respond. The Public and its Problems (1925) is, for<br />

all intents and purposes, the most penetrating case for an active polity and for<br />

radical democracy any American has ever written. With Dewey, Mills held that<br />

the promiscuous use of the term “democracy” to describe the de facto<br />

plebiscite of electoral politics, and other mechanisms by which consent is<br />

achieved by representative political institutions, is unwarranted. The<br />

institutions of the liberal state still need the consent of the governed. But the<br />

legislative and executive branches are increasingly beholden to the holders of<br />

institutional power, not their electors, except insofar as the public refuses to<br />

confer consent to policies which they perceive to be contrary to their interests<br />

and, as in the case of social security “reform,” succeeds in staying the hand of<br />

legislators beholden to corporate power, at least for a time. Having entered<br />

into an alliance with the military and corporate orders, the political directorate<br />

becomes a self-contained body, undemocratic in both the process of its<br />

selection and its maintenance.<br />

Dewey’s concept of democracy recalls the New England town meeting in<br />

which the “public” was not a consumer of the work of active and influential<br />

people, but a participant, a decision-maker, in the community’s political and<br />

social life. In this respect, it is important to recall Mills’s “Letter to the New<br />

Left” (1960). The letter outlined the principles of participatory democracy on<br />

the basis of Dewey’s concept of the public, and was, perhaps, the single most<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

influential document in the early history of Students for a Democratic Society,<br />

one of the key organizations in the development of the social movements of<br />

the 1960s. SDS’s program, enunciated in its manifesto, The Port Huron<br />

Statement was constructed around the concept/demand for “participatory”<br />

democracy in which “ordinary people” could control the “decisions that<br />

affected their lives.” It presupposed the same distrust of the state and its<br />

branches that Mills evinced years earlier. But unlike the immediate post-World<br />

War II years when, notwithstanding its de facto expiration, the New Deal still<br />

inspired broad support for what Herbert Croly termed The Promise of<br />

American Life (which Mills names as the most important work of liberal<br />

statism), two decades of militaristic statism and the appearance of a new<br />

generation of political activism made Mills’s radical democratic appeal more<br />

audible.<br />

III<br />

Mills was also a great taxonomist. With his mentor, Hans Gerth, he published<br />

in 1953 a major social psychology, Character and Social Structure, which<br />

situates the self firmly in the social and historical context which shapes and is<br />

shaped by it. This work is, perhaps, the premier instance of Mills’s efforts to<br />

combine theoretical social science with the distinctly American psychology of<br />

William James and George Herbert Mead, but in these days when the little<br />

boxes of the mind seem to pervade social thought, this book languishes in the<br />

archives of largely unread masterworks. Gerth and Mills’s bold juxtapositions<br />

are simply too adventuresome for a social science academy for which<br />

conventional wisdom seems to be the farthest horizon of possibility.. And his<br />

numerous essays covered the broad expanse of issues in American politics and<br />

culture, a range which has caused more than one detractor to complain that he<br />

is “all over the place.” In this respect, Mills is a true scion of the great thinkers<br />

who founded the social sciences. Their task was to provide a philosophical<br />

scaffolding to the disciplines, a project which Mills understood did not end<br />

with the canonical works. As a pragmatist, he was acutely aware that theory<br />

requires constant renewal and revisions and that, contrary to much current<br />

thinking, the problem is not one of “applications” of received wisdom but to<br />

interrogate the wisdom in the light of contemporary developments. So, even as<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

Mills borrows concepts such as “élite” from eminent forebears, he refuses the<br />

hierarchical thinking that informed the writings of theorists such as Mosca and<br />

Pareto. For example, he invests new significance to it in the process of<br />

investigating historically-situated élites. As a result, the labor union élite and<br />

the power (ruling) élite display different characteristics, although in The New<br />

Men of Power we can see the first pass at the development of a new theory<br />

His main theoretical project, explicated most fully in Character and Social<br />

Structure, was to situate the biographies of leading economic and political<br />

actors—labor leaders, the main figures in business, military and political<br />

institutions—within the social structure and the spatio-temporal context<br />

which set the limits and provided the opportunities for their activity. This<br />

methodological imperative is designed to account for individual variation of<br />

broad types, but also demonstrate the degree to which the social structure—<br />

explicitly named in terms of key institutional orders sets, at a specific time and<br />

specific place, the limits as well as the opportunities for individual and group<br />

action. Thus, our biographies mediate, and are mediated by, the institutional<br />

frameworks which condition decision-making. While, except in White Collar<br />

Mills is interested mainly in describing and explaining the structure of power,<br />

rather than of the worlds of the relatively powerless, this work is always<br />

undertaken in the interest of reconstructing a democratic public.<br />

we shall use this term psychic structure (emphasis in the<br />

original) to refer to man conceived as an integration of<br />

perception, emotion, and impulse. Of course there are other<br />

psychic functions, memory and imagination for example, but<br />

we shall limit our terms at this point. For our purpose,<br />

“psychic structure” will refer to when, how and why man feels,<br />

perceives and wills.<br />

At the core of Gerth and Mills’s theory are the concepts of “institution” and<br />

“self.” The notion of institutional order connotes the complex of institutions<br />

which, taken together, constitute what we loosely designate as the structure of<br />

power in “society,” chiefly the political, economic and military orders. Thus<br />

conceived the character structure of individuals formed by physical, and social<br />

conditions, particularly those of childhood biography, including family and<br />

schooling prepares them for playing certain “roles” within the institutional<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

orders to which they gravitate or are assigned by virtue of their education and<br />

training, situations which themselves are the outcome of certain interactions<br />

and relationships. The formation of the self in childhood is crucial for<br />

structuring the life chances of individuals, conditioning, if not completely<br />

determining the ways they structure knowledge, their emotional and volitional<br />

proclivities. But these processes are only relatively unique in individuals;<br />

conditions of social location, class, race and ethnicity, and education—play a<br />

decisive part in shaping the choices available to whole groups of people. The<br />

basic unit of analysis then, is not the individual but collective selves.<br />

Thus his writings are suffused with “ideal types”—Weber’s methodological<br />

prescription to fashion composite profiles against which to measure any<br />

particular instance of the type—arranged horizontally as well as vertically. The<br />

models assembled in The New Men of Power—of labor leaders, or in The<br />

Power Elite, where he provides a collective portrait of business leaders, and in<br />

his essays published in the collection Power Politics and People which contains<br />

several composites of the various publics which he addresses and to which he is<br />

obliged to respond—give a glimpse of Mills’s lifelong approach to social<br />

knowledge: first, produce a composite profile of the subject. Then, provide<br />

detailed historically-informed descriptions of the context within which the<br />

subject(s) operate, and evaluate the relative salience of each element of this<br />

context to how the subject is shaped. Then, return to the subject by unpacking<br />

the composite to break down the different social and character types. Finally,<br />

re-place them in the larger political, economic and cultural situations. To what<br />

end? To find out what are the alternatives to the main drift of politics and<br />

ideologies. Needless to say, although a student of élites, Mills asks whether the<br />

democratic movement from below, of the rank and file union members,<br />

fractured publics of consumers and intellectuals, may succeed in overcoming<br />

the pervasive tendency toward oligarchic domination of government and civil<br />

life.<br />

For most of his academic career Mills taught sociology at Columbia<br />

University. He produced social knowledge but was also an intellectual agitator.<br />

He was deeply interested in advancing the science of sociology as a means of<br />

giving us a wider understanding of how society worked. But, from the late<br />

1940s when, at age thirty two, Mills and Helen Schneider produced their<br />

landmark study of the American labor union leaders, he remained a close<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

student of social movements; his writings span analyses of the labor<br />

movement, the student left, the peace movement and others. He swam,<br />

intellectually, against the current, yet unlike many independent leftists who<br />

saw only defeat in the post-war drift toward militaristic-corporate political<br />

economy and despaired of relevant political practice, he was, above all, a<br />

practical thinker whose interest was always to describe the “main” chance as a<br />

dead end and to counterpose the chances for leftward social change.<br />

Consequently, even when he is the most descriptive of, say, labor leaders, and<br />

portrays the new middle class in terms of subordination and as allies of the<br />

leading élites, his eyes never strayed far from the question of “ what is to be<br />

done?” What are the levers for changing the prevailing relations of power?<br />

How can those at or near the bottom emerge as historical subjects?<br />

Mills is aware that to reach beyond the audience of professional social scientists<br />

he is obliged to employ a rhetoric that, as much as possible, stays within<br />

natural, even colloquial language. Addressing the general reader as well as his<br />

diminishing audience of academic colleagues, Mills conveyed often difficult<br />

and theoretically sophisticated concepts in plain, but often visual prose,<br />

described by one critic as “muscular.” And, perhaps most famously, he was a<br />

phrasemaker. For example, his concept of the “main drift” to connote<br />

conventional wisdom, as well as centrist politics encapsulates in a single phrase<br />

what others require paragraphs to explain. And, instead of using the Marxianloaded<br />

term “crisis” or the technical dodge “recession,” to describe conditions<br />

of economic woe he employed the colloquial “slump.” He characterizes the rise<br />

of industrial unions after 1935 as the “big story” for American labor, a term<br />

which encompasses history and common perception. But the imperatives of<br />

the Cold War—especially the emergence of the military as a dominant<br />

institutional order—constitutes the big story of the immediate post-war era.<br />

Mills wrote scholarly works but, in keeping with the style of a public<br />

intellectual, he was also a pamphleteer, a proclivity that often disturbed his<br />

colleagues and, in one of the more odious forms of academic hubris, led some<br />

to dismiss him as a “mere journalist.” In fact, this dismissal may, in addition to<br />

his boldness in attacking the big themes of social theory and analysis, account<br />

for the sad truth that since the late 1970s his major works are virtually unread<br />

in social science classrooms, have disappeared from many scholarly references,<br />

and are largely undiscussed in the academic trade. In the last decade of his life,<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

manifestos and indictments of the prevailing social and political order issued<br />

from his pen as frequently as sociological works. In fact, The Power Elite,<br />

which has inspired a sub-discipline whose academic practitioners include G.<br />

William Domhoff, America’s leading consumer advocate and anti-corporate<br />

campaigner, Ralph Nader, and a veritable army of “public interest” researchers,<br />

has always been controversial on theoretical grounds, but also, despite its often<br />

meticulous and comprehensive collection of “data,” criticized for lack of<br />

objectivity in its clear democratic bias. In these days when most members of<br />

the professorate have retreated from public engagement except as consultants<br />

for large corporations, media experts, and recipients of the grant largesse of<br />

corporate foundations and government agencies who want their research to<br />

assist in policy formulation, or confine their interventions to professional<br />

journals and meetings, Mills remains an embarrassing reminder of one possible<br />

answer to this veritable privatization of legitimate intellectual knowledge. In<br />

1939 his colleague Robert S. Lynd published a probing challenge to<br />

knowledge producers of all sorts called Knowledge for What? He asked the<br />

fundamental question: to whom is the knowledge producer responsible? To<br />

the state? To private corporations? To publics that are concerned with issues of<br />

equality social justice? (Robert S. Lynd, 1939)<br />

Mills rejects as spurious the prevailing doctrine according to which the social<br />

investigator is obliged to purge the work of social and political commitment.<br />

His values infuse the sociological research and theorizing and he never hides<br />

behind methodological protestations of neutrality. Mills is, instead, a partisan<br />

of movements of social freedom and emancipation while, at the same time,<br />

preserving his dedication to dry-eyed, critical theory and dispassionate,<br />

empirical inquiry. An advocate of a democratic, radical labor movement he<br />

was, nevertheless, moved to indict its leadership, not by fulmination, but by a<br />

careful investigation of how unions actually worked in the immediate post-war<br />

period. A self-described “man of the left,” in the late 1940s Mills provoked his<br />

left publics to outrage when he concluded that the “old” socialist and<br />

communist movements had come to the end of the road. By the late fifties, as<br />

the frost of the Cold War melted a bit after the rise of Nikita Khruschev to<br />

power in the Soviet Union and the power élite’s recognition that the anti-<br />

Communist purges had hurt U.S. domestic as well as foreign policy, he was<br />

loudly proclaiming the need for a “new” left that had the courage to throw off<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

the ideological baggage of the past, especially Marxist orthodoxy and<br />

Stalinism.<br />

Like Jean-Paul Sartre, whose Critique of Dialectical Reason appeared in 1960,<br />

he came to regard tradition, even radical tradition, as a political albatross. He<br />

never used Sartre’s fancy term “practico-inert” to mark the encrusted habits<br />

that induce people to reproduce the past in the present but he was a persistent<br />

critic of the habituation of the left to old ideas. A withering opponent of the<br />

Communists, sensing the impending doom of the Soviet Union after the<br />

opening provided by the Khruschev’s revelations of Stalin’s crimes at the 20th<br />

Communist Party Congress in 1956, he was among the first to urge the young<br />

to disdain their elders’ preoccupation with the “Russian” question and instead<br />

attend with fresh eyes and hearts to the tasks at hand: to oppose U.S.<br />

intervention in the affairs of revolutionary societies and to establish the<br />

framework for a radical democratic society.<br />

I have no doubt he was right to urge the young radicals to distance themselves<br />

from the past, at least in the short or intermediate term. But he never made<br />

clear that he himself had been reared, politically, on the Russian question and<br />

forgot that those who ignore addressing the failure of the revolution were<br />

doomed to relive it, an eventuality he was never cursed to witness. That the<br />

New Left, which soon captured the imagination of an entire generation, went<br />

awry may not be attributed exclusively to its refusal to address really existing<br />

socialisms of the Stalinist variety. But, it was entirely disarmed when, in the<br />

wake of the heating up of the war in southeast Asia, various Marxist ideologies<br />

became matters of urgent debate; most young leftists found themselves<br />

overwhelmed. They were moved by guilt as much as ignorance to confer<br />

uncritical support to the Vietnamese communists and even hailed the efforts of<br />

Pol Pot in Cambodia. By 1970, many reared the New Left were no longer<br />

Mills’ spiritual children; they all but renounced his democratic faith in favor of<br />

a “third world” dogma of national liberation at all costs. But, ironically, Mills<br />

himself was not immune from such enthusiasms.<br />

The book-length pamphlets were received as more than controversial, not only<br />

because they were, in many minds, notoriously heretical for their tacit<br />

violation of academic insularity, but also because they broke from the main<br />

tenets of the Cold War anti-Communist consensus at a time when, under<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

siege, political repression was still alive and well in the United States. The<br />

Causes of World War Three (1958) is, in many respects, a popularization and<br />

application to the international scale of The Power Elite. It depicts world<br />

politics in terms of the rivalry to two power blocs, one led by the United<br />

States and the other by the Soviet Union, both of which are governed by<br />

irresponsible élites whose conduct of the nuclear arms race threatens the very<br />

existence of humanity. Written in a period when one could count the number<br />

of radicals with full-time appointments in American universities on one hand<br />

and when the preponderant ex-radicals had “chosen the west,” this equalization<br />

of responsibility for the world crisis between east and west endeared Mills<br />

neither to the communists and their periphery, for whom the Soviet Union<br />

was virtually blameless for the state of things, nor to Cold War liberals for<br />

whom any suggestion that United States foreign policy could contribute to the<br />

chances for the outbreak of World War III was as shocking as it was absurd.<br />

Hidden in the pages of his work is the influence of the one rather obscure<br />

strain of radicalism which, after the war, declared that both camps were forms<br />

of a new anti-democratic, militaristic capitalism and boldly, but futilely, called<br />

for the formation of a “third” camp whose base would be a radicalized labor<br />

movement in alliance with other anti-capitalist elements of the population.<br />

The project failed since at the time of its formulation, the leading unions in<br />

every capitalist country were busy making deals with their own corporations<br />

and with the capitalist state, and leftists were divided between those who were<br />

safely ensconced in the Cold War consensus or, despite everything, remained<br />

Soviet apologists. Mills’s appeal to the “public,” translated in this context to an<br />

appeal to the middle class liberal center, proved more effective for it<br />

corresponded to the emergence of a mass movement against the testing and use<br />

of nuclear weapons and for an end to the Cold War. Needless to say, the<br />

preponderance of American labor leaders, including Walter Reuther, the liberal<br />

president of the largest industrial union, the auto workers, were aligned with<br />

their own government’s policies and were convinced that the price of<br />

demilitarization was nothing less than a new slump. And even as he discounted<br />

the politicos as allies to the top layers of corporate and military power, Mills<br />

was equally skeptical that the intellectuals, the social type upon which political<br />

dissent conventionally relies, were adequate to the occasion.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

A self-declared independent leftist (which, in the Cold War era meant an anti-<br />

Stalinist, but unaligned radical), Mills had been influenced by Trotskyism early<br />

in his life. He carefully separated the still influential Communists from<br />

radicalism. The Communists were influential precisely because the party had<br />

been an important vehicle for organizing major industrial unions and for<br />

bringing militant workers into the New Deal. During the war, they played a<br />

major role in enforcing the wartime no-strike pledge and the government’s<br />

drive for productivity. Mills believed that whatever oppositional politics they<br />

evinced after the war was due, almost exclusively, to the chasm between the<br />

United States and the Soviet Union.<br />

Listen Yankee (1961) an exemplary instance of Mills’s penchant for rowing<br />

upstream, was, during its early years, a fierce defense of the Cuban revolution<br />

when, even for many anti-Stalinist radicals, it appeared that the regime was<br />

dedicated to raising living standards and was still open to a democratic society.<br />

At a time when even the liberal icon, Oregon Senator Wayne Morse, was a<br />

vocal advocate of counterrevolution and supported the Kennedy<br />

administration’s ill-fated Bay of Pigs invasion, Mills asserted the right of the<br />

Cuban people to determine their own destiny and sharply condemned U.S.<br />

policy in the Caribbean and Latin America. He excoriated liberals and<br />

conservatives alike for their support of anti-popular regimes such as that of<br />

Batista in Cuba and Somoza’s brutal Nicaraguan dictatorship, pointing out<br />

how the U.S. government had opposed democratic efforts by financing<br />

military counterinsurgency, especially against the Arbenz regime in Guatemala<br />

as well as Cuba’s new revolutionary government. While he had been a lifelong<br />

anti-Communist, Mills saw the Cuban revolution as a harbinger of the long<br />

struggle of peasants and workers for liberation from colonialism and<br />

imperialism and predicted serious future confrontations between the spreading<br />

insurgencies and the United States which, under Democratic and Republican<br />

national administrations alike, became the main defender of the dictators.<br />

Indeed, for the length of the 1960s and beyond, Mills’s provocative<br />

intervention seemed prescient. In Colombia, Douglas Bravo led a formidable<br />

armed uprising and Che Guevara led a band of guerillas into the Bolivian<br />

jungle which, like the Colombian revolt, failed. But, with Cuba’s material<br />

help the Sandanistas in Nicaragua and the National Liberation Front in El<br />

Salvador were alive with revolutionary activity and, by the mid-1960s the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

dormant Puerto Rican independence movement revived under Marxist<br />

leadership which closely identified with the Cuban revolution. In the 1970s,<br />

Maurice Bishop organized a successful uprising in Grenada which openly<br />

aligned itself with the Cuban revolution and <strong>Michael</strong> Manley’s democraticallyelected<br />

left social-democratic government in Jamaica forged close ties with<br />

Cuba. However much he was smitten, Mills framed much of his own<br />

discourse in terms of the significant of these events for America’s neo-colonial<br />

foreign policy and for America’s future. Lacking the tools of discriminating<br />

evaluation, many young radicals not only gave their unconditional support but<br />

enlisted as volunteers in Grenada, Cuba and Nicaragua’s education and health<br />

efforts.<br />

IV<br />

Mills is both an exhilarating exemplar of the role and reach of the public<br />

radical intellectual, and at the same time, a sobering reminder of how far the<br />

human sciences have descended since the end of the Vietnam War. For even in<br />

death Mills was an inspiration to a generation of young intellectuals estranged<br />

from the suburban nightmare of post-World War II America and eager to<br />

shape their own destiny, and to some in his own generation who, in fear and<br />

trembling, had withdrawn from public involvement, but yearned to return.<br />

The decline of social engagement and political responsibility that accompanied<br />

the ebbing of the impulse to reform and revolution in the 1970s and 1980s,<br />

witnessed the shift of labor, socialist and social liberal parties and movements<br />

to the liberal center. Many erstwhile radical intellectuals who retained their<br />

public voice moved steadily to the right, motivated, they said, by the<br />

authoritarianism of the New as well as the Old Left, and by their conviction<br />

that American capitalism and its democratic institutions were the best of all<br />

possible worlds.<br />

He suffered the sometimes scorching rebuke of his contemporaries and, even as<br />

he won the admiration of the young as well as the tattered battalions of left<br />

intellectuals, had severed his ties with much of the liberal center which sorely<br />

needed to hear his argument that, in face of the awesome and almost complete<br />

hegemony of the power élite, American democratic institutions were in a state<br />

of almost complete meltdown. That recently a small body of scholars have<br />

revisited his legacy should be welcomed. The question of whether intellectuals<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Stanley Aronowitz<br />

will remain tucked into their academic bunkers depends not only on the<br />

depressions or wars to pry them out. Indeed the economic slumps that have<br />

punctuated the last two decades have failed to move most to utterance,<br />

although there is evidence that, after 9/11 some radical intellectuals have<br />

engaged in protest against the U.S. promulgated war on Iraq or have entered<br />

the debate on the side of the government. In the final reckoning, even if, after<br />

1950, most of Mills’s tirades were self-motivated, although a decade later<br />

Mills looked to an aroused coterie of young intellectuals as the source of a new<br />

democratic public, it is usually resurgent labor and other social movements to<br />

which intellectuals respond. While it can be argued that prior to 9/11 there<br />

were signs of revival in the political opposition, it remains to be seen whether,<br />

after suffering the defeats of the early years of the 21st century, the radical,<br />

nomadic spirit of C. Wright Mills will inculcate the minds and hearts of the<br />

intellectuals and activists upon whom he bestowed so much hope.<br />

Stanley Aronowitz is Distinguished Professor of Sociology at the Graduate<br />

Center, CUNY. His latest book, How Class Works, is available from Yale<br />

University Press.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


P<br />

Ali Hossaini<br />

Vision of the Gods:<br />

An Inquiry Into the Meaning of Photography<br />

by<br />

Ali Hossaini<br />

hotography is ubiquitous within global culture, but we hardly understand<br />

its meaning. And we have only a dim comprehension of its origin. Unlike<br />

cinema, which contains the complexities of motion and montage, the<br />

photograph is simple and, for the most part, brutally realistic. Perhaps the<br />

photograph has seemed too obvious to merit prolonged scholarly attention.<br />

Histories of the medium abound, but their authors follow a pattern<br />

exemplified by Alison and Helmut Gernsheim’s distinguished History of<br />

Photography, first published in 1955. By the standard account, the first<br />

inklings of photography appeared when a 5th century scholar noticed a<br />

camera-like phenomenon, and culminated in the 1820s, when Nicephore<br />

Niepce doped a pewter plate with light-sensitive chemicals and exposed it<br />

within a camera obscura. At their most comprehensive, standard histories<br />

include references to the mediaeval scientists who experimented with pinhole<br />

optics and ultimately invented the camera obscura.<br />

Though the standard account is correct in its details, it neglects the broader<br />

context of photography. Photography is an evolutionary phenomenon, not a<br />

fixed process, and it has drastically altered society at each stage of refinement.<br />

Starting with simple devices, the medium has branched into an enormous<br />

family of technologies that includes cinema, television and digital imagery.<br />

Individuals use cameras, but the medium is far more powerful in the hands of<br />

corporations and the state. Optical media entertain and inform, impress and<br />

oppress; they permeate everyday life, yet cultural theory does not approach<br />

this variety from a coherent base of understanding. What ties together<br />

snapshots and surveillance? Theorists perceive the social effects of mass<br />

media, which range from liberation to abject dehumanization, but the origin<br />

of these effects has not been outlined. We need a paradigm that captures the<br />

common thread of photographic technologies, one that matches the<br />

sophistication of contemporary engineering. Current theory of the<br />

photograph depends on the camera, but the physical device is insufficient to<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

explain the evolution of the optical media, particularly as it progresses toward<br />

the dematerialized realm of digital imagery and virtual reality.<br />

Much has already been written about virtual reality. Though the medium is<br />

not yet viable, it has ample precedents ranging from Plato’s Cave Passage to<br />

nineteenth century dioramas. The strongest precedent, however, is the virtual<br />

experience offered by photography and cinema, both of which derive, like the<br />

examples I just gave, from reflection upon optics. Whether or not it comes to<br />

pass, the idea of a virtual environment should serve as a boundary condition<br />

for photographic theory, because it illustrates the profound impact of optics<br />

on society. For most of its existence humanity has experienced the world<br />

through natural faculties, but the introduction of optical media has<br />

reorganized perception and replaced subjectivity. As a consequence,<br />

individuals have become part of increasingly larger collectives where both<br />

thought and experience are defined by objective standards. The environment<br />

has become mediated, defined by surveillance and institutions, and, as Jean<br />

Baudrillard has poignantly described, experience is often equated with media.<br />

The central issues in photographic theory are defined by the history of optics.<br />

The study of vision and light has an ancient pedigree which scholars have<br />

only nodded toward when discussing photography. Scientific optics matured<br />

by the 3rd century BCE, when Euclid codified its principles alongside its<br />

parent discipline, geometry. Organized as a set of formal principles, Euclid’s<br />

Geometry describes the construction of forms in an abstract space, giving their<br />

appearance to an ideal intelligence. In contrast, his Optics described the<br />

behavior of light in relation to a situated viewer. Taken together, the two<br />

works present a theory of how the physical world is constituted in reality and<br />

appearance, with the latter describing how light transmits information from<br />

the physical, geometric realm to the eyes.<br />

Euclid’s optical study represents a high point of knowledge that remained<br />

almost unmatched until the scientist Ibn al-Haytham published his optical<br />

treatises in the 9th century. 1 Building on the work of Euclid and his<br />

successor, Claudius Ptolemy, Al-Haytham founded physiological optics,<br />

which distinguished the functioning of the eye from the behavior of light. He<br />

also laid the groundwork for the camera obscura by accurately explaining the<br />

pinhole effect which underlies its mechanism. Several centuries later, well<br />

after al-Haytham’s Optics passed into Europe, the camera obscura emerged<br />

from the laboratory as a tool for artists, but it was not until the 1600s that<br />

Johannes Kepler discovered the proper operation of the eye. Much like a<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

camera, human eyes augment the pinhole effect with a lens, bringing an<br />

inverted image to bear on a light-sensitive surface, the retina. (See Figure 1)<br />

Figure 1: The structure of the eye compared to the camera<br />

(Wald, 1953)<br />

Unlike those who followed, Kepler considered retinal inversion to be an<br />

important problem. But he despaired of solving it and left its resolution to<br />

later generations. 2 Progress came slowly. Little was known about the nervous<br />

system until the nineteenth century, and only recently have scientists learned<br />

how to inspect thought in real time. Now we know how the brain<br />

apprehends the retinal image. But many questions still elude us. What effect<br />

does media have on perception? Has sharing images—sharing perceptions—<br />

affected individuality? Optical technologies permeate daily life, and, by<br />

bridging vast distances, they have changed the nature of vision. The personal<br />

has become institutional, mediated by cameras and computers, and we<br />

inhabit virtual bodies created by photography, the telephone and television.<br />

So our primary question might address how technology affects biology. Is<br />

technology a form of evolution? Has social evolution superseded biological<br />

evolution? Will governments and corporations completely subsume the<br />

individual, limiting choice to matters of consumption? In confronting these<br />

questions, optics is relevant to some of the most pressing issues in cultural<br />

theory and, for that matter, human existence.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Photography represents the growing intimacy of humanity with machines.<br />

Tools originally amplified physical strength, but, with the advent of tools like<br />

the abacus, the compass and eyeglasses, they have been applied increasingly to<br />

mental faculties, giving us both modern media and digital computers. And<br />

recent advances in bioengineering are giving tools a quasi-organic status,<br />

merging them with our bodies. In 1950, biologist George Wald said<br />

photography was the product of convergent evolution:<br />

Of all the instruments made by man, none resembles a part of<br />

his body more than the camera does the eye. Yet this is not by<br />

design. A camera is no more a copy of an eye than the wing of<br />

a bird is a copy of that of an insect. Each is the product of an<br />

independent evolution; and if this has brought the camera<br />

and the eye together, it is not because one has mimicked the<br />

other, but because both have had to meet the same problems,<br />

and have frequently done so in the same way. This is the type<br />

of phenomenon that biologists call convergent evolution, yet<br />

peculiar in that one evolution is organic, the other<br />

technological. 3<br />

Wald then makes structural, mechanical and chemical comparisons between<br />

eyes and the photographic process. The similarities are numerous. Both use a<br />

lens to project an image within a dark chamber, both correct for aberrations<br />

in form and color, and both apprehend images through a grid of<br />

photosensitive receptors. As the capstone to his argument, Wald ends his<br />

essay with a discussion of optography, the art of making images with eyes.<br />

Willy Kuhne, a professor of physiology at the University of Heidelberg,<br />

invented optography in 1878. Kuhne was studying rhodopsin, the retinal<br />

pigment that changes state in response to light. During the course of his<br />

experiments, he realized that he might be able to take pictures with a living<br />

eye. He immobilized a rabbit and forced it to look at a window for three<br />

minutes. He then decapitated the animal, sliced open its eye, and soaked its<br />

retina in alum to fix the rhodopsin. The next day the dried retina revealed an<br />

image of the window. Two years later he repeated the process with the head<br />

of an executed criminal. The resulting optigram, which he reproduced in a<br />

drawing, is the only known picture taken with a human eye. Unfortunately,<br />

the scene it displayed was unidentifiable. (See Figures 2 and 3)<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Figure 2: The rabbit’s last view (Wald, 1953)<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Figure 3: A human optigram<br />

(Wald, 1953)<br />

Evolutionary convergence explains the utility of cameras and casts a revealing<br />

light on media theory, particularly the work of Marshall McLuhan.<br />

McLuhan’s descriptions of how media affect cognition seem hyperbolic,<br />

more metaphor than science, but if we accept Wald’s conclusions, then the<br />

spread of media has a biological basis. Photography is an auxiliary form of<br />

perception. It amplifies vision, takes it to extremes of size, distance and speed.<br />

It extends the human nervous system, particularly when coupled to electronic<br />

distribution. Visual media are among the cornerstones of modern civilization,<br />

found in the service of law, science and industry, as well as the arts and<br />

personal life. When we examine the category of photography as a whole,<br />

including cinema, video and digital imagery with paper and film, we find a<br />

medium that mimics vision, providing sensations that bridge space and time.<br />

Photographs are concrete perceptions that orient groups of people around a<br />

singular, objective experience. Along with social hierarchy, and other<br />

technologies of communication, photographic images constitute a body social<br />

that behaves according to common impulses.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Photography has thus developed along two axes. The first is a train of<br />

technical and scientific discovery that stretches deep into history. As far as we<br />

know, optics was invented by the mathematicians of ancient Greece, but its<br />

parent science, geometry, is of far older pedigree, having reached an advanced<br />

state in the pre-Classical cultures of Mesopotamia and Egypt. The other axis<br />

derives from the communication needs of the cultures that developed<br />

photography and related technologies. Each axis reinforces our understanding<br />

of the other, and, by linking the two together, we can describe the evolution<br />

of technologies which led from archaic times to photography then cinema,<br />

television and virtual reality. As I discuss in a larger work, Archaeology of the<br />

Photograph, a consistent set of social, political and economic goals has driven<br />

the emergence of these practices, and photography stands as the paradigm of<br />

both their physical appearance and mechanical functioning.<br />

The Ontology of the Photograph<br />

CAMERAS ARE THE MOST OBVIOUS ELEMENT OF PHOTOGRAPHY, but we<br />

should not stay preoccupied with them. Photographs are conveniently<br />

rendered by cameras, but the information within a photograph—the<br />

information that defines it—can be generated in several ways. Photorealist<br />

imagery can be produced by hand and computer, so we cannot rely solely on<br />

the camera to define photography. Nor can we place cameras at the<br />

beginning of the medium, for we still need to ask the question, “What is the<br />

origin of the camera?” Many histories of photography have been written, but<br />

only lately with the emergence of satellite surveillance and virtual reality, can<br />

we completely define the paradigm of optics. An unwritten history lies<br />

behind the development of photography.<br />

To access this history, we cannot, as scholars have traditionally done, treat<br />

photography as a discrete industrial process. Photography is not a specific<br />

activity but a way of seeing, a mechanized form of perception. It is a technical<br />

approach to visual representation based on optics. (Or perspective: they mean<br />

the same thing in their original usage.) And photography is ultimately<br />

geometric since optics/perspective derives from the investigation of space. As<br />

we shall see, photography also relates to the physiology of vision, and its<br />

advances have tracked fundamental progress in the scientific understanding<br />

of cognition. Starting with its invention in the nineteenth century,<br />

photography projects forward into cinema, television and digital media. And<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

it telescopes backward into earlier modalities based in painting, drawing,<br />

cartography and geometry. Media scholars have hinted at this history, but<br />

engineers have written it, and it remains inscribed in generations of tools.<br />

Photography is paradigmatic act of representation, one which blankets the<br />

environment with information. The expression of photographic technology<br />

has followed a path set in the formative days of civilization, and, ironically, its<br />

purpose is clearest in its earliest forms.<br />

Like most machines, cameras automated processes previously done by hand.<br />

The tools of Renaissance painters are obvious forebears to the camera which<br />

makes photography closely related to classical modes of representation like<br />

architecture and mapping. If we trace these practices—perspectival painting,<br />

architecture and cartography—to their collective origin, we arrive at the<br />

archaic civilization of Sumer and the technology of land surveying, or applied<br />

geometry. Surveying occupies a privileged place in the history of photography<br />

and, more generally, of technical drawing. It inspired theoretic geometry,<br />

which in turn spawned optics, astronomy and cartography, the first sciences.<br />

I will collectively refer to these geometric disciplines as technologies of<br />

perception. Succeeding civilizations around the Mediterranean and Europe<br />

have adopted these perceptual practices, and a direct line of transmission<br />

links Sumerian land surveying to present-day photography and electronic<br />

media.<br />

Within this article, I will describe some of the connections between archaic<br />

surveying and modern technology. An important premise of my discussion<br />

lies in the nature of automation or, more precisely, the definition of the<br />

machine. I mentioned above that preoccupation with cameras can lead to<br />

misunderstandings about photography. The photographic camera is a<br />

machine for taking pictures, and it thus seems different in kind from any<br />

other apparatus, even the camera obscura, which still requires an artist to<br />

draw the image. But since a photograph is simply information—the<br />

information specific to a visual display—we need to question whether<br />

cameras are necessary to produce a photographic “thing,” that is, an optically<br />

correct image. This is clearly not the case. Renaissance painters and their<br />

successors devised accurate methods for producing optically correct images,<br />

and their work conditioned the emergence of the camera obscura and<br />

photographic machinery.<br />

I submit that the work of perspectival artists—a group that ranges from<br />

Donatello to the photorealists—lies between intuition and automation. In<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

other words, perspectival drawing lies between the delicate naturalism of<br />

Paleolithic painting and the stark realism of photography. During the<br />

Renaissance, the production of art began to be mechanized, and picture<br />

making went beyond expression to become media.<br />

The work of Lewis Mumford may clarify my position. In Technics and<br />

Human Civilization, Mumford introduces the concept of the megamachine, a<br />

social machine that coordinates human rather than nonhuman energy.<br />

Arising in early civilizations, the megamachine arose when leaders used<br />

scientific principles to increase the size, power and precision of work crews.<br />

By coordinating human labor with precise measurements and tools, early<br />

leaders were able to direct the construction of massive pyramids without the<br />

use of engines and other advanced technologies. Unlike many other human<br />

endeavors, a primary feature of the megamachine is the dominance of<br />

method. Like an inorganic mechanism, workers applied tools of<br />

measurement that let them precisely engineer buildings according to plan.<br />

Their own judgment was auxiliary to measurements and central direction.<br />

Like earlier surveyors and architects, Renaissance painters allowed scientific<br />

principles to determine the structure of their work. Their work was closely<br />

allied with engineering and architecture. Optical effects were difficult to<br />

realize with medieval tools, so artists quickly adopted more advanced<br />

machines to assist their efforts. The requirements of perspective conditioned<br />

the emergence of the camera obscura in the late Renaissance, and the desire<br />

of successive generations to fully automate image production led to<br />

photography. The process continues today. Electronic processing is<br />

dematerializing the camera into the universal machine (and universal<br />

medium) of computers. New technologies like digital animation and virtual<br />

reality use optical principles, but, like Renaissance painting, they posit the<br />

camera as an ideal machine, a perspective that organizes representation<br />

according to a coherent point of view.<br />

Photographs function by reproducing the vantage of the eye, and the analogy<br />

between eyes and cameras runs deep. As Kuhne first demonstrated, the eye is<br />

a camera, and vice versa, and they can sometimes be exchanged. Our<br />

understanding of the brain is on the increase; it seems likely that, in the near<br />

future, cameras will induce vision through direct neural implants. 4 When fed<br />

directly to the brain, media becomes immediate, more like an environment<br />

than an overlay. McLuhan’s description of an optical-electronic nervous<br />

system may have sounded fictional when he uttered it, but it is rapidly<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

becoming true in the fundamental sense, mainly because media now<br />

integrates our perceptual apparatus. The convergence of technology with<br />

biology continues on the level of image processing. Like human vision, the<br />

camera produces internal representations of the world which can be recalled<br />

and manipulated. Fidelity is key to photography and natural perception<br />

because both are directed toward depicting an environment that must be<br />

exploited for navigation, communication and survival. Thus the ontology of<br />

the photograph derives from its fundamental utility as a representation of the<br />

visual environment—and from the act of vision itself.<br />

Andre Bazin presented one of the first theoretic statements regarding<br />

photographic realism in his essay, “What is a Photograph,” which appeared<br />

in 1937. He attributes a simple realism to the medium, as he opens and shuts<br />

the door on a theory of photography.<br />

Besides, painting is . . . an ersatz of the processes of<br />

reproduction. Only a photographic lens can give us the kind<br />

of image of the object that is capable of satisfying the deep<br />

need man has to substitute for it [the object] something more<br />

than a mere approximation . . . The photographic image is<br />

the object itself, the object freed from the conditions of time<br />

and space that govern it. No matter how fuzzy, distorted, or<br />

discolored, no matter how lacking in documentary value the<br />

image may be, it shares, by virtue of the very process of its<br />

becoming, the being of the model of which it is the<br />

reproduction; it is the model. 5<br />

Even as he gives the final word on photography, Bazin indicates that cinema<br />

is a much richer field for theory, closing with, “On the other hand, cinema is<br />

also a language.” Bazin subsequently founded the field of cinema studies, and<br />

for decades scholars had little to say about photography. In the late 1950s,<br />

Roland Barthes discussed photographs, taking a linguistic approach adopted<br />

in the 1970s by a coterie that included Alan Sekula, Victor Burgin and Judith<br />

Williamson. Since then a field of critical photographic studies has emerged to<br />

analyze the various uses of photography in propaganda, advertising,<br />

surveillance and personal life.<br />

Though placed in a multitude of disciplines, most studies of photography are<br />

either sociological, seeking a language of photography within its human<br />

elements, or phenomenological, attending to the mysteries of perception at a<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

distance. Some claim that perspective is simply a Western convention for<br />

representation, though such arguments are difficult to maintain against<br />

optics. The dawn of the digital era has added a twist to writing on<br />

photography, giving a new generation of scholars the opportunity to decry a<br />

post-objective era.<br />

Current scholarship on photography is fragmented because it possesses no<br />

disciplinary paradigm. Beyond an unproductive dichotomy between realism<br />

and conventionalism, and an often-blurry technical history, we have no<br />

concrete understanding of how photography emerged, let alone how it<br />

engages the social mechanism. What forces gave impulse to the camera and<br />

its trajectory of development? While Bazin painfully emphasizes the objective<br />

realism of photography, and derails further study, he points to a generative<br />

function within the medium. The photographic image is not just an ersatz<br />

representation. It reproduces the environment, the thing itself, and becomes<br />

an ideal (or virtual) reality for the viewer. Bazin introduces photography with<br />

a discussion of cave paintings and Egyptian mummification. These practices,<br />

he claims, reveal the primal motives of artistic representation. He justifies this<br />

strange comparison by claiming our ancestors sought to overcome space and<br />

time by preserving appearances. In other words, to control life by<br />

constructing an idealized, artificial environment. Though concerned at this<br />

point with the plastic arts, from an historical perspective Bazin has<br />

approached the crux of photography and the technologies supporting it.<br />

While the comparison of mummies to photographs may stretch our powers<br />

of analysis, we can find other representational practices in ancient cultures<br />

which do not.<br />

Land surveying has been a profession for over six thousand years. First<br />

invented in Sumer and spreading quickly to Egypt, it emerged as one of the<br />

essential technologies of civilization, and it underlies virtually every advance<br />

in urban culture, technical representation and mass communication. It is a<br />

critical form of organized perception, but its contributions to society are<br />

often overlooked. Neither cities nor social hierarchies could exist without<br />

surveyors and the property boundaries they create. Estates, buildings, roads,<br />

and aqueducts all depend on the related acts of surveying, planning and<br />

impressing new designs into the earth.<br />

Bazin described mummification as a primal impulse behind photography,<br />

but study of surveying provides far more insight. Beyond the fact that optics<br />

derived from geometric investigation, surveying also plays the preservative<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

role described by Bazin. Since ancient times surveyors have preserved the<br />

state and its social organization by defining property boundaries. Herodotus’s<br />

description of ancient Egyptian land surveyors is no less apt today.<br />

For this cause Egypt was intersected. The king moreover (so<br />

they said) divided the country among all the Egyptians by<br />

giving each an equal square parcel of land, and made this his<br />

source of revenue, appointing the payment of a yearly tax.<br />

And any man who was robbed by the river of a part of his<br />

land would come to Sesostris and declare what had befallen<br />

him; then the king would send men to look into it and<br />

measure the space by which the land was divided, so that<br />

thereafter it should pay in proportion to the tax originally<br />

imposed. From this, to my thinking, the Greeks originally<br />

learnt the art of measuring land.<br />

Like photography, surveying was invented to extend perceptual powers.<br />

Urban planners could not comprehend the expanses necessary to build cities<br />

and empires, and surveying was the first in a long series of perceptual<br />

technologies invented to create objective, accurate images of the<br />

environment. It functioned as the eyes and visual memory of the early<br />

megamachine, a state bureaucracy that created specialized labor and social<br />

hierarchy. In contrast to cave paintings or mummification, the goal of<br />

surveying and related practices is to inform, not to express aesthetic or ritual<br />

values. At the core of a survey map is data, a representation of visual space<br />

which conveys useful information.<br />

We should keep in mind that visual representations are not necessarily<br />

pictorial. Archaic survey records, or cadastres, do not contain visual<br />

representations; they are nothing more than tables of measurements which, if<br />

associated with a particular area, describe a plot of land. In form and content<br />

they resemble digital databases which exist for the same purpose. However,<br />

by 2300 BCE an interesting parallel to the evolution of digital computing<br />

occurs in Mesopotamia. Cadastres had been growing in both size and detail<br />

since their invention in the fourth millennium, and an unknown surveyor in<br />

the service of the great UR III bureaucracy introduced an innovative means<br />

to displaying geometric data: a graphic interface. We would now call this<br />

device a map. 6 Survey maps developed rapidly within Mesopotamia,<br />

becoming a means to manipulate land through urban planning. Maps were<br />

used to manage estates, design buildings and govern cities. (See Figure 4)<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Much like the modern GUI, the cadastral map appealed to the innate<br />

capacities of human vision. While tables continued to exist, then as now, the<br />

map was a preferred means of displaying complex environmental data in<br />

some situations.<br />

Figure 4: An UR III Empire survey map, dating from approximately 2300 BCE<br />

(Nissen, 1993)<br />

Another telling parallel exists between archaic and contemporary civilizations.<br />

When placed alongside an early cadastral map, an aerial photograph reveals<br />

the origins and purpose of our quintessentially modern art. (See Figure 5)<br />

Both present an expanse of land, and both achieve geometric accuracy by<br />

assuming an ideal aerial perspective. More importantly, both are directed at<br />

the same purpose: the comprehension and management of productive earth.<br />

Despite the distance of time, the Mesopotamian scribes who staffed the first<br />

bureaucracies would have understood the function and purpose of our late<br />

model GIS computers, the Geographic Information Systems that overlay<br />

representations of land with useful information about productivity, access<br />

and ownership. 7 (See Figure 6)<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Figure 5: An aerial photograph (Space Imaging EOSAT Notes, 1997)<br />

Bazin’s recognition that the photograph is a model for reality, as well as an<br />

objective reality in its own right, aim at the core of photography and related<br />

practices. We often think of perception, visual or otherwise, as passive,<br />

oriented only toward accurate representation. Photography has often been<br />

treated in a similar manner, as a wax tablet supplying “truth at twenty-four<br />

times a second” but little more. But the ontology of truth tells only half the<br />

story. In practice neither vision nor photography has ever<br />

Figure 6: A GIS display<br />

Like the earliest survey maps, Geographic Information Systems display an image of terrain<br />

overlaid with information such as ownership, usage, disposition of the soil. (Antenucci,<br />

1991)<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

been passive. Each supplies information as a means to action, and, like the<br />

related practices of surveying and architecture, each provides a medium for<br />

the redesign of the environment. Like life, which sustains its own biosphere,<br />

humanity generates a milieu friendly to its needs. Vision, architecture and the<br />

intermediate technologies of photography, surveying and planning are the<br />

means to creating a genuinely human environment.<br />

The Idiot King<br />

SURVEYING EMERGED WITH THE EARLY city-state, and it has served the cause<br />

of urban civilization ever since. The ancients did not have distinct concepts<br />

of technology, science and politics, but their ideologies, which are religious in<br />

nature, still reveal the essential relationships between their disciplines. Prior<br />

to urbanization, Mesopotamians adhered to animistic beliefs similar to those<br />

of contemporary tribes. After the advent of cities, they developed state<br />

ideologies based on the sovereignty of sky gods like Inanna and Ningursu.<br />

Divine sanction conferred legitimacy upon rulers, and worship occupied<br />

most ceremonies of state. Sky gods were associated with planets—Inanna rose<br />

with Venus—and their celestial vantage revealed their transcendent authority.<br />

Hovering over their lands, they were the lords of all they saw, and their<br />

followers built ziggurats as aerial vantages for divine supervision.<br />

Mesopotamian hymns capture the awe, and lack of privacy, early civilization<br />

felt before these symbols:<br />

It [the temple Eninnu] kept an eye on the country;<br />

no arrogant one could walk<br />

in its sight.<br />

awe of Eninnu<br />

covered all lands like a cloth. 8<br />

Toward [the temple] Shugalam, dread place<br />

the place from where [the god] Ningursu<br />

keeps an eye on all lands . . .<br />

Thrust against heaven<br />

is its dread halo,<br />

and over all lands hovers<br />

great awe of my house 9<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

The urban state has unfolded from the concept of the sky god, idealized as a<br />

tyrant who governs the earthly state through all-encompassing vision. Aerial<br />

perspective—conceived as a divine seat, but realized as the technology of<br />

surveying—was a key advance in the feasibility of state institutions.<br />

Surveying realizes the perspective of the Inanna and her ilk, and architecture<br />

embodies their creative will, which depended on their ability to view land<br />

from an objective vantage. From its first appearance in land surveying, the<br />

organization of vision has driven the development of optics, and the drive to<br />

merge individual and collective perception continues. Architecture and media<br />

both derive from the objective gaze, and the modern spy satellite, surveying<br />

the masses below, is its virtual embodiment. In non-political terms, we could<br />

say that photography arose from a concern with method. What is the proper<br />

way to represent the environment? Whether manifest in Sumerian surveying,<br />

Renaissance painting or aerial surveillance, this question bears on the<br />

aesthetic, political and scientific concerns surrounding perceptual<br />

technologies. Though technical in nature, it is wrapped in the institutions of<br />

power—property and architecture—that caused it to emerge.<br />

How do we define property as a practical concept? Sumerian religion<br />

provided the first transactive language, or code, for comprehending land in<br />

terms of legal ownership. Pre-urban societies assign landholdings according to<br />

organic need, and the size of plots are naturally limited by the ability of<br />

owners to manage an area. Sky gods owned the land beneath their gaze, and<br />

they conveyed ownership to select classes within society as a legal right. By<br />

underpinning the legal doctrine of ownership, the sky god constituted the<br />

state and simultaneously posed a perceptual problem to its adherents.<br />

Ownership demanded management, but Mesopotamian leaders could only<br />

comprehend small areas with their native faculties—an area big enough to<br />

feed themselves and their families. In order to govern larger areas, they<br />

needed to attain the perspective of the sky god. Land surveying solved their<br />

problem. By combining simple surveying techniques with advances in<br />

accounting, early managers could remotely manage their estates, an ability<br />

which greatly extended their capacity to rule. The priests of Mesopotamia<br />

used geometry to attain the vision of gods.<br />

In contemporary terms, we might call this action at a distance telepresence or<br />

virtual experience. The key to understanding why these terms apply lies in<br />

our definition of reality. If “real” means a visually correct image of a distant<br />

place, then they are certainly inappropriate. But if “real” describes an accurate<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

representation, then a bureaucrat reviewing survey maps surely has<br />

experienced a distant place in a meaningful way. Mathematical knowledge<br />

lies at the basis of perceptual technology, and the data generated by<br />

technology is independent of a particular display. We admire photographs for<br />

their resemblance to vision, but both photography and vision operate by<br />

decomposing a visual scene into components. We can hardly say that<br />

photographs carried within television signals, or a computers, have lost their<br />

identity. They have simply changed mode, a process that occurs when our<br />

brains translate retinal images into neural impulses.<br />

Geometry derived from conscious reflection on material practices. As a<br />

cognitive process, it is related to our ability to communicate and coordinate<br />

the self within society. Despite our singular feelings of value, self-awareness<br />

may have evolved as an outgrowth of language, perhaps simply to facilitate<br />

cooperation. But this does not mean consciousness is merely the capacity for<br />

symbolizing. Thought lacks direct instrumentality, arising as it does from the<br />

unique situation of the body in its environment. It is the awakening of<br />

symbol to itself, the realization of the capacity to communicate through<br />

structured discourse. Through its embodiment, its placement in a desiring<br />

body, consciousness projects thought onto its environment, understanding its<br />

surroundings through stories that reflect its awareness of self, situation and<br />

desire. Aside from sheer presence, which demands acknowledgment, the gap<br />

between situation and desire, between the real and the ideal, is the primary<br />

motive for conscious beings to communicate. We imagine a better situation,<br />

and then, with the aid of others, try to realize it. Individual desire calls society<br />

and its tools for communication into being.<br />

Millennia of social development preceded the relatively quick formation of<br />

the first city-states in Mesopotamia. It is not a given that archaic<br />

Mesopotamians were evolving toward urban civilization. Instead it seems<br />

likely that they confronted conditions such as drought which forced them<br />

into progressively smaller regions. Necessity demanded they create efficient<br />

organizations of production and distribution, and bureaucracy emerged to<br />

handle the administrative load. Sky gods emerged to consolidate<br />

Mesopotamian society within state institutions, and, though our society is<br />

more sophisticated, we are still realizing the consequences of Sumerian<br />

ideology.<br />

Ancient priests may have conceived social hierarchy, private property and<br />

land surveying as a religious exercise, but their practical intent was the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

maintenance of cities. These institutions have persisted until today, gaining<br />

in variety and complexity, but never losing the ideal form of legal sovereignty<br />

and unchallenged will. To be effective, Sumerian religion absorbed the<br />

natural sovereignty of individuals, who gradually became subjects of the state<br />

and its dictates. By appropriating taxes and labor, the state constituted itself<br />

as a corporate regime defined by the active surveillance of territory. The<br />

image of the sky god gained force over time, and it eventually entered the<br />

divinely ordained king whose will embodied the political state.<br />

Though symbolically concentrated in his body, the king could hardly manage<br />

every facet of daily administration. As a practical matter, the royal will and its<br />

divine legitimacy was dispersed among a hierarchy of officials. In many<br />

modern states, every individual bears some degree of legal sovereignty,<br />

though their liberty is constrained by law. In all states, property ownership is<br />

a key signifier of status, and it became the basis for the division of physical<br />

and cognitive labor. Property constituted the res publica by situating<br />

individuals within abstract mechanisms of hierarchy, land rights and surplus<br />

value. On this basis, the state and its institutions could organize themselves as<br />

virtual bodies, performing their duties in urban interiors according to rational<br />

divisions of labor. Surveying and bookkeeping documents mediated<br />

communication within states, sending information from the peripheries and<br />

directives from the center. As Herodotus notes, records migrated toward<br />

central locations, archives that contained virtual images of land. Maps,<br />

calendars and accounting tables became essential tools within complex civil<br />

societies, serving as percepts that greatly expanded the faculties of their users.<br />

Mediated by tablets, papyrus and pens, and transported throughout the<br />

nation, these representations became a sensory apparatus, one that supported<br />

the state through disciplined perceptions.<br />

Early technologies like surveying clarify the essence of later practices like<br />

photography, mass media and digital imagery. For centuries the<br />

Mesopotamians did not distinguish the representation of land from other<br />

forms of information. Aside from its tools of measure, geometry was not<br />

treated as a special discipline, and cadastres contained only written<br />

measurements accompanied by descriptions of location. Later sketches<br />

displayed the same prosaic attitude, although it was no doubt difficult, if not<br />

impossible, to achieve visual effects on a clay tablet. But the first maps<br />

nonetheless transformed raw information into something resembling vision,<br />

and they inspired a transformation of the way we understand our visual<br />

environment.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

The transformation accelerated when the sciences of Mesopotamia and Egypt<br />

passed into Greece. A critical attitude evolved within Greek science, perhaps<br />

because thinkers tried to reconcile alternative systems. By the sixth century<br />

BCE, Greek artists began to display a concern with realism, and we see the<br />

beginning of furious philosophic debates over proper representation.<br />

Investigations into visual truth began emanating from workshops and<br />

academies, and over centuries painters adapted the techniques of perspective,<br />

laying the foundation for optical science. Greek investigations into scientific<br />

representation culminated in Euclid’s Geometry and Optics, which were<br />

completed in the third century BCE.<br />

Among their many accomplishments, Euclid’s mathematical studies reconcile<br />

the dualism that plagued Platonic philosophy. Plato denigrated perception<br />

because the shifting appearances of things contradicted what we know. In<br />

mathematical terms, geometry describes what we know, and optics describes<br />

how we see. By deriving optics from geometry, Euclid demonstrated the<br />

validity of visual information. Vision distorts geometric space—it distorts<br />

reality—but it does so systematically. As any surveyor knows, by accounting<br />

for the effects of perspective, we can glean accurate data about visual objects.<br />

The obvious solution to Plato’s dilemma is to systematically relate optical<br />

“slices,” individual perspectives, to a coordinated, geometric whole.<br />

Thinkers from Claudius Ptolemy 10 to Rudolph Arnheim 11 have proposed<br />

something like Euclid’s schema, and <strong>Stephen</strong> Kosslyn’s work Image and Brain<br />

extends that work to the imagination. When we remember a visual image,<br />

the visual cortex hosts an event physiologically similar to actual perception.<br />

We may recall James Gibson’s arguments against mental imagery, but<br />

Kosslyn presents convincing experimental evidence for pictorialism and the<br />

matter should be closed. 12 However, we can still query the human visual<br />

system, questioning why it evolved as it did. Could we have evolved a<br />

“sightless vision,” the cybernetic vision Paul Virilio describes in The Vision<br />

Machine? We sometimes perceive without sensation, as when we<br />

automatically block a stray ball. There are alternative forms of visual<br />

perception that do not rely in internal representation, for instance, in<br />

computers that use neural nets for navigation. The human brain is often<br />

described as a neural net. Could consciousness have evolved differently?<br />

What role does preconscious processing play in our responses? How does<br />

vision relate to faculties like language?<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Visualization became important when Paleolithic toolmakers began working<br />

together. Unlike most animals, humans have few inborn skills, so their<br />

survival depends on creativity and learning. Even when chipping rudimentary<br />

knives, early humans needed mental conceptions, and probably verbal<br />

descriptions, to guide their activities. Speech and imagination sufficed to<br />

organize society until the advent of city-states, when large projects demanded<br />

precise and durable forms of visualization. Thousands of workers often<br />

contributed to a project, and monumental works could not be built without<br />

coordinating (and subordinating) their judgment. Leaders needed objective<br />

standards to manage projects, and they invented the disciplines of<br />

measurement and quantitative analysis. Perceptual technologies coordinated<br />

the social body, allowing large groups to behave as one. While planning<br />

scribes would gather physical data such as size, weight and volume. They<br />

would then devise schedules by analyzing productivity, available labor and<br />

other factors. Deployed within a social body, geometric representation<br />

formed a matrix of objective perception, and the mechanical accuracy of<br />

surveyors enabled the functioning of social technics, the megamachine<br />

described by Mumford.<br />

And what of our human art? Must we not say in building it<br />

produces an actual house, and in painting a house of a different<br />

sort, as it were a man-made dream for waking eyes?<br />

Plato, “The Sophist”<br />

I have described perceptual technologies as activities that coordinate an<br />

autonomous social body. But, from the individual standpoint, the products<br />

of surveying and related technologies create far more than external pictures.<br />

They constitute institutions, and they structure society by defining relations<br />

of property, administration and commerce. Unlike natural vision, which<br />

views the environment as a continuum, perceptual technologies couple<br />

attention to social boundaries consisting of laws, architecture, contracts,<br />

receipts and deadlines. By organizing perception into an objective whole,<br />

they create a secondary environment based on institutional rather than<br />

individual imperatives. Property lines, buildings, calendars—none of these<br />

are pregiven in experience. They are human creations that reenact nature.<br />

Subjectivity and objectivity take on new meanings in this context. Like<br />

geometry and optics, they refer to strategies of political organization, not<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

scientific truths. Taking the state as an analytic condition, we might speculate<br />

on the next stage of perceptual technology. Surveying produced perspective,<br />

which in turn led to photography and television. Engineers are already<br />

producing immersive digital environments, some of which may do away with<br />

cameras and material displays. Direct neural couplings will be widely<br />

available in the foreseeable future. Scientists have already bypassed eyes and<br />

ears, and advanced haptic interfaces could simulate the balance of senses.<br />

There is no reason to feed real-world camera images into a neural coupling—<br />

digital environments would work just as well. Artists and engineers have<br />

already started designing imaginary spaces, giving us a taste of possible future<br />

environments. (See Figure 7) In a stable virtual world, neurally induced<br />

experiences could collapse the opposition between subject and object, along<br />

with distinctions among vision, photography and architecture. As our senses<br />

adapted to the new environment, culture might evade nature altogether,<br />

referring only to itself. What sort of societies might evolve in such a space?<br />

Figure 7: A Virtual Space<br />

Designed by the NOX studio in Rotterdam, this virtual space is accessed through head<br />

mounted goggles. Within a few years, the environment may be accessed through direct<br />

neural coupling between the brain and the computer which generates it. (Zellner, 1999)<br />

Strict control of virtual worlds could create a kind of planetary dungeon.<br />

Economics would dictate the rhythm of daily life, which would be governed<br />

by a central body according to laws of consumption and production.<br />

Freedom could be severely curtailed in this environment, which might<br />

resemble a digital version of Jeremy Bentham’s panopticon. Proposed in the<br />

eighteenth century, the panopticon was designed as an ideal prison which<br />

concealed nothing from the guards. Misbehavior was unlikely in such a place.<br />

More advanced technologies are beginning to impose a similar effect on<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

society at large. Surveillance cameras blanket most cities, and authorities are<br />

using computer networks to increase their effectiveness. Complemented by<br />

satellite-based surveillance, an immersive cyberspace could completely<br />

assimilate individual faculties to objective data. Privacy would be impossible<br />

since every perception would be controlled, even witnessed. Videotapes in<br />

arcade games capture the completeness of digital surveillance. People can<br />

either join the game, or they can observe it from the perspective of one or<br />

more players.<br />

On the other hand, these same technologies could celebrate an extreme form<br />

of individuality. A wave of progress in genetics and engineering could take<br />

humanity well beyond its current state, and, driven by the urge for selffulfillment,<br />

an elite, or perhaps an entire society, might decide to fuse with<br />

machines and retreat into cyberspace. Here they would develop a poetics of<br />

technology, crafting experience with unlimited mental resources. 13 Freed<br />

from productive labor, these cyborgs might reject the objective order<br />

altogether. Imagination would become the organizing principle of experience.<br />

(See Figure 8) It may be difficult to sustain a collective under such<br />

conditions, particularly if companionship could be provided by one’s own<br />

creations. Unchecked individualism could break down society, creating a<br />

future bizarrely reminiscent of myth. Living in a programmed environment,<br />

bodies and the world could assume any shape, support any whimsy.<br />

Computers would then plunge individuals into a kind of idiocy—immersed<br />

in technology they would be playmates who met only for companionship. Or<br />

who never met at all. Confined to their individual worlds, each person would<br />

exist as a mechanical god, an idiot king presiding over a terrain of<br />

information.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Figure 8: Architecture of the Future<br />

Marcos Novak designs virtual environments according to poetics rather than gravity.<br />

Unencumbered by mass and utility, they function as fantastic playgrounds for the mind.<br />

(Zellner, 1999)<br />

The scenarios outlined above describe the polar tendencies toward freedom<br />

and tyranny inherent within perceptual technologies, the machines we use for<br />

observation and communication. As a concept, the sky god displays both<br />

tendencies, and, when applied within society as an ideology, it creates the<br />

primal existential dilemma. What is the role of the individual within society?<br />

The previous scenarios represent extreme possibilities in the development of<br />

media, and we can hope that society evolves within their balance. It is hard to<br />

predict what scenario may come to pass. Biotechnology is advancing more<br />

quickly than we would have imagined even ten years ago, and engineers are<br />

busy devising new ways to reconstruct our senses. Already we largely dwell<br />

within a virtual reality, an artificial world enclosed by architecture, media and<br />

telecommunication. But we may never build a completely cybernetic world,<br />

preferring to simply augment natural perception with layers of information.<br />

The sky god can model transcendent freedom, or it can subsume the<br />

individual to a corporate will. We see within it the modern individual who<br />

uses machines to control destiny. In the beginning this power was wielded<br />

only by kings, but, since the beginning of urbanization, more and more<br />

individuals have gained the power to structure their world. Personal liberty<br />

has never been greater except perhaps in certain tribal cultures. At the same<br />

time, the ability of central authorities to control expression, movement and<br />

now biology has advanced immeasurably, and we always stand on the brink<br />

of totalitarianism. Whether concrete or digital, our cities embody the creative<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

gaze and the architectural will of the sky gods. Though our kings have lost<br />

divine right, we have launched the sky god into orbit, just as the Sumerians<br />

conceived. The constant presence of surveillance cameras, whether hanging<br />

from buildings or satellites, should remind us of the potency of such vision,<br />

and how it might alter our environment. However it evolves, virtual reality<br />

will bear the imprint, and the dangers, of the ideal state and the vision of the<br />

gods.<br />

References<br />

Antenucci, John (1991) with Kay Brown, Peter Croswell and <strong>Michael</strong><br />

Kevany. Geographic Information Systems: An Introduction to the Technology.<br />

New York: Van Nostrand Rheinhold.<br />

Arnheim, Rudolph (1969) Visual Thinking. Berkely, CA: 1969.<br />

Bazin, Andre (1967) ‘Ontology of the Photograph’ in Trachtenberg, Alan,<br />

(ed.) Classic Essays on Photography. New Haven, CN: Lee’s Island Books:<br />

237-245.<br />

Crary, Jonathon. (1990) Techniques of the Observer: On Vision and Modernity<br />

in the Nineteenth Century. Boston, MA: MIT Press.<br />

Euclid (1908) The Thirteen Books of The Elements. Sir Thomas Heath (trans.)<br />

New York: Dover Publications.<br />

Euclid (1945) Optics in The Journal of the Optical Society of America 35 (5):<br />

357-372.<br />

Fried, Itzhak, Christof Koch and Gabriel Kreiman (2000) Nature 408<br />

(6810): 357 – 361.<br />

Gernsheim, Helmut and Alison (1955) The History of Photography from the<br />

Earliest Use of the Camera Obscura up to 1914. London: Oxford University<br />

Press.<br />

Gibson, James J. (1968) The Senses Considered as Perceptual Systems. London:<br />

George Allen & Unwin.<br />

Herodotus (1992) The Histories. trans. George Rawlinson. London, UK: The<br />

Guernsey Press.<br />

Jakobsen, Thorkild (1987) The Harp that Once . . . New Haven, CT: Yale<br />

University Press.<br />

Kosslyn, <strong>Stephen</strong> (1994) Image and Brain. Boston: MIT Press.<br />

Lindberg, David C. (1976) Theories of Vision: From Al-Kindi to Kepler.<br />

Chicago: University of Chicago Press.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

Mumford, Lewis (1966) The Myth of the Machine: Technics and Human<br />

Development. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Jovanovich.<br />

Nissen, Hans (1993), Robert K. Englund and Peter Damerow. Archaic<br />

Bookkeeping. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.<br />

Ptolemy, Claudius. The Geography. New York: Dover Publications, 1991.<br />

Sabra, A. I. (1989) Ibn al-Haytham’s Optics. London: The Warburg Institute.<br />

Space Imaging EOSAT Notes, Spring 1997<br />

<strong>Stephen</strong>s, Ferris. J. (1953) “A Surveyor’s Map of a Field.” Journal of<br />

Cuneiform Studies 7 (1) 1953.<br />

Virilio, Paul (1995) The Vision Machine. Bloomington, IN: The Indiana<br />

University Press.<br />

Wald, George (1953) ‘Eye and Camera’ in Scientific American Reader. NY:<br />

Simon & Schuster: 555-68.<br />

Zellner, Peter (1999) Hybrid Space: New Forms on Digital Architecture. New<br />

York.<br />

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />

I would like to thank Douglas Kellner of UCLA, Robert Solomon of<br />

University of Texas at Austin and Steve Best of the University of Texas at El<br />

Paso for their comments and encouragement.<br />

Notes<br />

1<br />

Sabra, A. I. (1989) Ibn al-Haytham’s Optics. London: The Warburg<br />

Institute.<br />

2<br />

This important episode on the history of optics has often been misconstrued<br />

by modern commentators, for example, in Techniques of the Observer (Crary,<br />

1990: 27, 35, 38). In support of his statements, Crary cites David Lindberg.<br />

Crary seems to have missed the conclusion of Lindberg’s argument. At one<br />

point, Lindberg states that Kepler was familiar with the argument that an<br />

earlier attempt to construe the eye as a camera obscura. But on the next page,<br />

the comparison capitulates to a powerful counter-argument (Lindberg 1976:<br />

182-206). Other inaccuracies in Crary’s work include the surprising assertion<br />

that Euclid and Aristotle were familiar with the pinhole effect (Crary, 1990:<br />

27).<br />

3<br />

Wald, George (1953) ‘Eye and Camera’ in Scientific American Reader. NY:<br />

Simon & Schuster: pp. 555-68.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Ali Hossaini<br />

4<br />

Research in this area has made great strides. Scientists at both the University<br />

of North Carolina and MIT have developed retinal implants that carry<br />

impulses from a camera directly to the optic nerve, temporarily giving limited<br />

vision to blind people. Reports are available in the websites of their respective<br />

universities.<br />

5<br />

Bazin, Andre (1967) “Ontology of the Photograph” in Trachtenberg, Alan,<br />

(ed.) Classic Essays on Photography. New Haven, CN: Lee’s Island Books: pp.<br />

237-245.<br />

6<br />

<strong>Stephen</strong>s, Ferris. J. (1953) “A Surveyor’s Map of a Field.” Journal of<br />

Cuneiform Studies 7 (1) 1953 and Nissen, Hans (1993), Robert K. Englund<br />

and Peter Damerow. Archaic Bookkeeping. Chicago: University of Chicago<br />

Press.<br />

7<br />

Antenucci, John (1991) with Kay Brown, Peter Croswell and <strong>Michael</strong><br />

Kevany. Geographic Information Systems: An Introduction to the Technology.<br />

New York: Van Nostrand Rheinhold.<br />

8<br />

Jakobsen, Thorkild (1987) The Harp that Once . . . New Haven, CT: Yale<br />

University Press, p 422.<br />

9<br />

Ibid., pp. 398-400.<br />

10<br />

Ptolemy, Claudius. The Geography. New York: Dover Publications, 1991.<br />

11<br />

Arnheim, Rudolph (1969) Visual Thinking. Berkely, CA: 1969.<br />

12<br />

UCLA neurosurgeon Itzhak Fried and a team of researchers reported in<br />

Nature that the mind's eye—the imagination or mental view—generates<br />

mental pictures by using the same neurons that were activated when it saw<br />

the object or image. “Our study reveals that the same brain cells that fire<br />

when a person looks at a picture of the Mona Lisa are, in fact, the same<br />

neurons that excite when that person is asked to imagine the Mona Lisa.”<br />

(Fried, 2000)<br />

13<br />

Zellner, Peter (1999) Hybrid Space: New Forms on Digital Architecture.<br />

New York.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


A<br />

Thomas de Zengotita<br />

Fiction<br />

The Other Side *<br />

by<br />

Thomas de Zengotita<br />

t first only a few of us noticed, and we didn’t talk about it until later—<br />

though most of us probably tried to check with someone early on. I know<br />

I did. Putting it as a matter of curiosity, in passing, but seriously, the way you<br />

might ask “Have you ever had a dream where you dreamed you woke up?” But<br />

of course, in that case, a lot of people say yes, and the others at least know<br />

what you mean.<br />

All in all, it seemed like a good idea just to move on. Everything else was okay.<br />

Well, nothing was actually okay, because it was happening to everything, but<br />

nothing else was happening to anything, that’s the point. So you could adjust.<br />

I mean, if one day you woke up and everything in the world was yellow, it<br />

would definitely be weird. But after awhile you might be able to just say “Hey,<br />

one-color world,” and go about your business. But that comparison doesn’t<br />

really work because there would be major confusion in some areas, like<br />

recognizing beverages, if everything was yellow. Anyway, in the actual case,<br />

most of us made the adjustment and moved on.<br />

Except that, after awhile, it got more—pronounced, would be a good word.<br />

At first, you were only glimpsing the edges of the other side of things. And<br />

even those were in hazy outline, like a degraded holograph. So you weren’t<br />

100% sure that you hadn’t been seeing them all along, but just hadn’t noticed.<br />

Sort of like, when you feel a slight pain or ache, you sometimes think that<br />

maybe it has been with you for some time after all. Or as if you realized,<br />

through some accidental circumstance, that your peripheral vision was broader<br />

than you had realized up until now. Only, of course, your periphery wasn’t the<br />

issue in this case.<br />

* With acknowledgments to Edmund Husserl.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Thomas de Zengotita<br />

So you could still tell jokes and enjoy life for a certain time, even as it became<br />

definite that your view of the other side of things was extending further and<br />

getting more solid. Color and texture, and so on. Some people stuck it out<br />

longer than others, though. Because it did get harder to cope.<br />

In the early days, I went to a lot of movies. So did other people, I noticed. It<br />

was because things in the movies don’t have any thickness to see around. So<br />

everything in the movies stayed normal, or as normal as things in the movies<br />

ever were. So it was quite a relief to go to the movies.<br />

But later on, as the whole process advanced, and people were starting to lose it<br />

publicly and you really had to suck it up and hang tough just to navigate, I<br />

stopped going to the movies. It was too heartbreaking, the discrepancy. For<br />

me it was. When you went outside afterwards there was just no ignoring how<br />

drastic the change was. You couldn’t help but notice that you were seeing a lot<br />

of the other side of everything. The disparity was so stark. For me anyway, the<br />

movies caused this intense longing for the simpler times I had taken for<br />

granted, so I stopped going.<br />

But plenty of people reacted the opposite. They went more and more often.<br />

They went from one stall in the multiplex to the other to the other. If they<br />

could afford it. The movie theater people began to make sure that people<br />

bought another ticket each time, though. But they also began to stay open 24<br />

hours, which was good for people who could afford it. And they built more of<br />

them too.<br />

Other people stayed in their rooms a lot, in the dark with the TV or the VCR.<br />

After a certain point, the TV—the live TV—got really strange, though. There<br />

had obviously been some policy decision, and live TV people continued to<br />

pretend that nothing had changed. It got more and more obvious that they<br />

were pretending. You could see them trying not to look at things around them<br />

on the set. And they began to stare at their own monitors much more, to<br />

communicate with each other through the screens on the set much more. You<br />

could see that it was getting to be a struggle for them too. Not good to watch.<br />

Not helpful.<br />

But just the VCR could be really good. If you had just the VCR on, and the<br />

rest of the room was dark, it was almost completely okay. You knew where<br />

stuff was, just being guided by shadowy shapes was enough, and everything felt<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Thomas de Zengotita<br />

the same, so you could really be almost completely normal in a darkly<br />

shadowed room. That’s why so many people just went ahead and put out their<br />

eyes in the later stages. Many did it in groups. They ritualized it and,<br />

afterwards, when they were all together, touching in the dark, they could really<br />

say good-bye. Except that some of those groups went into panic, so that was a<br />

gamble too. Any way you chose was going to be a gamble.<br />

It wasn’t transparency, that’s the what you think when it’s first described, that<br />

things are going transparent, starting at the edges and then spreading further<br />

around. That wouldn’t have been a comfortable experience either, of course,<br />

but at least it’s conceivable. I remember once, when things were pretty well<br />

advanced but not up to any major threshold, some of us were starting to form<br />

groups, and we were talking to this woman who was still insisting that she<br />

didn’t notice anything specific, just a mood of disorientation. A lot of people<br />

went through a long stage of that, by the way. Something like that famous<br />

psychology experiment where you give people playing cards that are normal<br />

except the hearts are colored black and the clubs are colored red. People just go<br />

ahead and play poker or canasta or whatever, apparently without noticing. But<br />

their blood pressure and galvanic skin responses go haywire, and they get<br />

irritable and anxious and they want to stop playing all the time, but they never<br />

realize why. Sort of like that, except of course, you couldn’t stop playing in<br />

this case.<br />

Anyway, about this woman, I’m pretty sure she was just in denial. Her body<br />

language had that wound-up stretching quality and her eyes tended to rest at<br />

unlikely angles on the sky or some other blank expanse. When she had to deal<br />

directly with your face or with some object, her eyes had that stare-right-past-it<br />

look that allowed you to see something just enough to be able to use it<br />

without acknowledging it particularly. But I couldn’t be sure, of course; you<br />

couldn’t see what other people were seeing, so you could never be sure.<br />

Anyway, we were trying to describe it to her and she seemed to be trying to<br />

understand. She kept saying things like “You mean things are getting thinner<br />

and you can see through them?”<br />

She was trying to strike a bargain. If we would accept her description, she<br />

might be willing to admit the whole business. Otherwise, she wasn’t going to<br />

see it. But our group was committed. We were not one of the soft groups.<br />

That’s not it, we said, you just see around, you see the other side. But that’s<br />

impossible, she kept saying, my eyes are on this side. That was the big item for<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Thomas de Zengotita<br />

her, her own eyes—her outlook, so to speak. Sometimes she would touch her<br />

eyes. People like her didn’t last.<br />

But transparent things were good to look at, by the way. At least at first they<br />

were. Especially if whatever was around you wasn’t distinct from other things<br />

around you. Like in a room with the same wall paper all over, or sitting in the<br />

bushes. Then you could see the beginnings of the other side of the transparent<br />

thing—say a glass ball—but what you saw through it wasn’t that different<br />

from what you saw through your side, so the overall experience was pretty<br />

normal. When things got more advanced, though, you didn’t ever want to<br />

look at a transparent thing, of course. Or mirrors.<br />

Rushing water, say in fountains or waterfalls, was good too. Also fire. Seeing<br />

the other side of them was like seeing more of the same. But more. That<br />

feeling you used to get in normal times, watching a stream or campfire—the<br />

same feeling, but richer. That kind of thing became a point of pride for the<br />

hard groups. Others might gather under some phony explanation, but, in the<br />

hard groups, you were expected to meet it straight on and even revel in it. It<br />

was this feeling that, if you could just ride it, go with it—then you would reap<br />

some reward. And also the feeling that it didn’t matter what you did anyway,<br />

so you might as well enjoy it for as long as you could. You can see the machomasochism<br />

potential. The ultimate analogy would be jumping off a really tall<br />

building and deciding to enjoy the fall.<br />

So when we discovered intense experience enhancements, like rushing water or<br />

fires, we spent hours extolling the sensations and our own daring. Actually, I<br />

didn’t last with my hard group past a certain point. It got too forced. But it<br />

was a brave choice, you have to admit that.<br />

Another good thing was to be in the desert or by the ocean. Wide open spaces,<br />

in other words. If you looked into the distance and not at your immediate<br />

surroundings, well, the effect of expansion and release that you got in normal<br />

times had only been a muffled intimation. Large objects in the distance,<br />

mountains, say, and, most of all, the horizon itself on a clear day, the folding<br />

over and around of one’s vision on so grand a scale—it was like a dream of<br />

flying, soaring, but you were a great flock.<br />

So a lot of people gathered on beaches and deserts. When these places started<br />

to jam up, of course it defeated the purpose. There were crowd control<br />

problems, sanitation and so on—so that whole movement didn’t last long.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Thomas de Zengotita<br />

Some people just went out in boats, just went out to sea with supplies. I don’t<br />

know how it went for them in the later stages.<br />

And, yes, night got to be very welcome. That became when most people went<br />

out and mingled and did their errands. Of course, there had always been a<br />

welcome kind of night, the kind that comes after a really oppressive hot day,<br />

with gentle breezes stirring the trees in the dark around you when you step<br />

outside. Night in general got to be more like that. The dawn got to be what<br />

you dreaded. On some level, you kept expecting things to be alright again<br />

when you woke up. But they never were. That was bad.<br />

In the last stages, the only way you knew the difference between your side and<br />

the other side of anything was through your body habits. If you let it alone,<br />

your body knew what it would feel if you touched a thing—for example, that<br />

you would get a grip on the handle if you reached for the cup this way or that.<br />

But you had to take it for granted. That’s what I learned the hard way from<br />

being with someone when he started to touch things just for the reassurance.<br />

Once he began to do that, he got into this guessing game with himself about<br />

which side was facing his body and very quickly lost his ability to distinguish<br />

between the sides. In one afternoon, actually. I tried to distract him when I<br />

realized what was happening, but he was locked in by then. He would guess<br />

right a few times, and the relief would start to flow, and the desire for more<br />

relief would drive him to another flurry of touching, at which point, of course,<br />

he would miss a few and the fear would come back in that “Oh, god, please,<br />

not again” way that can be so wearing—and back he would go to testing,<br />

lining things up one by one after he had figured out with his hands which side<br />

was which, trying to memorize for each thing which side was which so that<br />

maybe he could learn how to tell the difference again. Impossible to do it that<br />

way, of course. It was a knack.<br />

When he started trying to get me to help him figure it out, I had to cut him<br />

loose. There was no way I could risk it. But that’s how I learned the<br />

importance of taking it for granted in my actions that I knew which side was<br />

which.<br />

Connected with this was not looking at any part of your own body—<br />

obviously never in a mirror, but also not in the course of your routine<br />

activities. The key parts to avoid were your hands and forearms, above all, but<br />

also your feet and legs if you had to look down for some reason. Luckily, this<br />

requirement dovetailed with learning how use your eyes in a general way to<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Thomas de Zengotita<br />

supervise overall performance, locating things, selecting what to reach for and<br />

so on, and then letting your hands do the detail work. So you would need to<br />

be letting your body habits determine which side of a thing you were on at<br />

exactly the very instant when you needed to turn your eyes away so as not to<br />

see your own limbs. You got in this groove of looking away just as you<br />

reached out or stepped down or whatever it was. That coincidence of<br />

requirements was really what made it possible to continue functioning in the<br />

later stages.<br />

Touching your own body parts, on the other hand, as opposed to looking at<br />

them, was probably the most grounding thing you could do. Touching<br />

anything was good, of course. That quickly became the source of your<br />

moment-to-moment faith. If you had ever wondered how blind people could<br />

possibly “read” those little Braille dots in the elevator, you didn’t wonder<br />

anymore! Stroking and holding things in public was acceptable right from the<br />

beginning. You could continue to conduct normal transactions with someone<br />

who was doing that—it didn’t really disrupt the interaction any more than if<br />

they had an unusual haircut, say, or an especially striking fashion accessory. But<br />

touching your own body parts was different because it wasn’t so easy to<br />

overlook in social situations, so for a long time people mostly did that in<br />

private or at least in the dark. Then it became okay to do in crowds, because of<br />

the anonymity. In the end, it didn’t matter any more and people did whatever<br />

they needed to do.<br />

Of course, if you were just rubbing your hands together or stroking your arms<br />

or keeping them folded snugly, that was okay anywhere right from the<br />

beginning. It just got more common. What wasn’t publicly acceptable for a<br />

long time was feeling slowly all over and around as far as possible, the way<br />

people learned to do almost by instinct, feeling not just with your hands but<br />

with your arms, and especially all over your face and head, and your legs and<br />

feet feeling each other, and also pressing your back, your spine, really hard<br />

against something solid. Your spine became very important.<br />

Reciprocal touching in social situations, handshaking and so on, that ended<br />

quickly. It led to clinging and violence. Besides, there were pairs and groups<br />

forming everywhere for all that. Almost everyone who lasted gravitated into<br />

the touching groups during the last stages. But, though comforting, such<br />

groups were risky, subject to obsessive pacts or outbursts of impulse that<br />

couldn’t be contained. The most durable groups prohibited both looking and<br />

touching, relying instead on conversation—and, of course, the singing. They<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Thomas de Zengotita<br />

stayed together and found some peace, right up to the end. I was in one of<br />

those groups, thank God. It just worked out that way, by accidental<br />

encounter. We gave ourselves in gratitude to music, and to words, which took<br />

no sides. We dwelt together in our voices and the stories that we told, stories<br />

of our world remembered. There were many beautiful moments.<br />

Thomas de Zengotita is a contributing editor at Harper's magazine. He teaches<br />

at The Dalton School and at the Draper Graduate Program at New York<br />

University. His most recent essay, "The Romance of Empire," appeared in<br />

Harper's, July 2003. "Hannah's Birthday" is forthcoming in Fiction, Summer<br />

2003. He is working on a book for Bloomsbury called Mediated, due out in the<br />

Fall of 2004.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Two Poems<br />

by<br />

Andy Clausen<br />

WCW BLUES<br />

Sexual lust may weaken me<br />

but I've always come back<br />

to my senses<br />

Sweet Free Emotion<br />

no one is corny<br />

here Sister, Brother<br />

It permeates!<br />

It melds and it<br />

coats and immerses<br />

It entwines<br />

and conceives<br />

It is gestating<br />

It is birthing!<br />

It's composing<br />

It's decomposing<br />

It has become<br />

One with<br />

the language!<br />

Young I felt<br />

I felt It<br />

I felt young<br />

With the super special<br />

extra souled tenacity<br />

of beneficial madmen<br />

That It, Yes It<br />

would come easy<br />

easy as sunrise<br />

We're not just talking<br />

Andy Clausen<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


lessed by the Muse<br />

here<br />

We're talking<br />

All Out<br />

Eternal Verse<br />

We're talking<br />

The Best<br />

The Best Ever<br />

I didn't want to quit<br />

my day job<br />

for a literary prize<br />

at South Sophomore State<br />

nor a token wild man be<br />

at the Festival of Squares<br />

Andy Clausen<br />

When I wrote tragedy<br />

It was earth shaking<br />

It was Epic<br />

You may have seen an oafish pretentious<br />

unlearned freak<br />

a trouble maker<br />

A bombed comedian<br />

a no literary value boor<br />

with severe problems<br />

Last night I tried to take a bottle of Rum<br />

to the Clear Light<br />

I am no longer possessed of an extra soul<br />

Those tragedies and lonelinesses I romanticized<br />

are real and pathetic<br />

The entire reason I deal with the outward show<br />

this Maya this supposed life<br />

in front of me<br />

The melodrama of art<br />

The death in life<br />

The purpose and cause<br />

Is aching like a mother fucker<br />

Now I know they really were against us<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Andy Clausen<br />

They had scorn and repugnance for the poor<br />

They didn't want their literature<br />

open to the creole cultures<br />

the underground metaphor<br />

They really didn't want the lower classes<br />

to rise<br />

Okay cartoonize, abstract, or use us<br />

rise as an individual maybe<br />

but as a class never<br />

This must be the working class writer blues<br />

This must be the working class blues<br />

This must the working class<br />

This must be the blues<br />

INSIDE OTISVILLE<br />

First in-class writing<br />

at the correctional facility<br />

(State Prison)<br />

I see 11 men--- 11 good men<br />

How do I know they're good?<br />

How does anyone know---<br />

I see the concertina wire, its cutting music<br />

I can't hear, only see<br />

I see the mind of a heart<br />

jump out of a hand<br />

the dream not deferred<br />

but exploding<br />

a load lightened by a gram<br />

an ounce a mote a speck<br />

and the heavy load is carried by<br />

a body that is not mine<br />

any longer<br />

a ghost carrying a cross<br />

I dream refrigerators and big deep couches<br />

and free dentists and the time I'll be home<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


and her arms<br />

I will not share--- but somehow<br />

that embrace that breath<br />

living inside the breath<br />

It will survive and enter the waters<br />

Andy Clausen<br />

I see the faces I've seen in the bars<br />

the off track betting parlors<br />

and littered parks, that I've seen<br />

down in the rust and black smoke<br />

down in the alligator warehouses<br />

up again on that gold dust sidewalk<br />

in the car next to me entering the Mid<br />

Town Tunnel selling flowers, papers<br />

at the Tri-Boro toll booth<br />

The face on the working streets of South Ozone Park<br />

that catch my eyes and turn away as do mine<br />

I see a little stream of light with floating lint butterflies<br />

and milky ways of insect fragments<br />

A woman's face in a piece of bread<br />

a dead man's last words in the grain<br />

of the sidewalks<br />

the grey and the dull<br />

institutional green<br />

What does that mean?<br />

What is a mistake that is paid for?<br />

What is the price society has set?<br />

I'm not society---I don't even like society<br />

I want to live in the Future<br />

freedom is another chance<br />

freedom is a big black bird<br />

over the rooftops<br />

undaunted by the smoky grim spume<br />

of strange industry<br />

Evil is not human<br />

Let me 12 years old again be<br />

and I'll show you a different world<br />

destiny<br />

Let me live That<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


I would give you how the moon<br />

is high<br />

How it is free to do whatever it wants<br />

and the only sounds are<br />

water air insects wind<br />

the weeping leaves of grass<br />

the laughing of machineless nights<br />

A festival of sleep walking<br />

a dream not a dream<br />

Andy Clausen<br />

Andy Clausen is the author of nine books of poetry, including 40th Century<br />

Man: Selected Verse 1996-1966 (Autonomedia, 1997), and Without Doubt<br />

(Zeitgeist Press, 1991, introduction by Allen Ginsberg). A coeditor of Poems for<br />

the Nation (Seven Stories Press, 2000), Clausen is a construction worker and<br />

teaches poetry in public schools and prisons in New York.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


C<br />

Kurt Jacobsen<br />

Review<br />

Terror and Liberalism<br />

by Paul Berman<br />

reviewed by<br />

Kurt Jacobsen<br />

an’t we all just get along? If not, do you mind awfully if we do away with<br />

you? Paul Berman argues that realists and leftists alike ignore irrational<br />

forces—“pathological mass movements”—that motivate global violence. He<br />

accordingly urges that liberal Western societies intervene militarily to stamp<br />

out these threats with, as the venerable saying goes, extreme prejudice.<br />

Berman delves into the extraordinarily complex question of terrorism and, in<br />

so doing, displays a desperate need to occupy the middle ground no matter<br />

where it may be. This hoary tactic can place one in strange, and even silly,<br />

positions. Where exactly is the middle ground regarding mass murder or<br />

female circumcision or slavery? (Spartacists may be annoying extremists but<br />

was Spartacus an extremist?) So Berman prudently takes the precaution of<br />

controlling where he winds up by dictating where the loony left and right<br />

margins are supposedly set.<br />

In Terror and Liberalism Berman tirelessly reiterates whatever the mainstream<br />

American media finds fit to print. Saddam in 1991 was poised to roll over<br />

Saudi Arabia. Arab problems are internally generated because heaven forfend<br />

that anyone mention colonial legacies or neo-imperial ploys. Saddam “threw<br />

the inspectors out” in 1998 (when they were withdrawn under severe White<br />

House pressure). The U.S. consequently “complained from the sidelines”—<br />

from which it had infiltrated CIA agents into UNSCOM. Scapegoating is<br />

Saddam’s “special genius”—although CIA Director George Tenet may beg to<br />

differ these days.<br />

Saddam gassed “his own” people, although most Kurds, as the gory record<br />

over many decades shows, hardly viewed themselves as “his” people, or even<br />

as Iraqis. Gas, of course, evokes gasps of horror in the West, partly because<br />

the West cannot be accused of using it, at least not since the RAF lavishly<br />

gassed rebel Kurdish and Arab villages in the conveniently forgotten 1920s.<br />

Even so stodgy a journal as Foreign Affairs noted in 1999 that economic<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Kurt Jacobsen<br />

sanctions have killed more people than all other weapons of mass destruction<br />

combined. Yet this daintier, distant form of death-dealing doesn’t appear to<br />

faze Berman, or most Westerners, at all. Berman knows, and plays to, his<br />

audience.<br />

Berman also recycles the tall tale that Clinton persuaded Barak to withdraw<br />

from “all but small portions of the West bank” so, accordingly, there is no<br />

rational “explanation for Arafat’s refusal of this magnanimous offer.”<br />

Palestinians do not want peace; ergo, they crave jihadic glory. Berman further<br />

speculates that they sought wider borders; a ravenous Palestinian imperialism<br />

clawing at Israel, or Lebanon or even New Jersey. As for Israel, anything<br />

short of Waffen SS behavior is construed as a heartwarming testament to its<br />

unparalleled humanity. Jenin was not Lidice; hence, the Israelis there<br />

accomplished a “breakthrough in relatively civilized army tactics.” Can<br />

Israelis, who hail the stand at Massada, really fail to grasp what happens to a<br />

populace which feels it has its back to the wall?<br />

Suicide bombers are a stunning inexplicable barbarity who “produced a<br />

philosophical crisis, among everyone around the world who wanted to believe<br />

that a rational logic governs the world,” says Berman. One can say much the<br />

same for many who watched the Bush team at work after 9/11. Berman<br />

seems to believe that the degree of civilization is measured by the distance at<br />

which a state neatly can kill. One gets the impression that if Palestinians had<br />

a nifty weapons lab devising remote control devices, Berman would think<br />

better of them. By contrast, Berman sees Israel as a perfectly reasonable<br />

liberal state, a judgment only about half of Israelis may grant him at any<br />

given time, depending on who is in charge.<br />

Berman laments that “war and hysteria” work to keep fearful citizens<br />

distracted and obedient, but he imagines this ancient formula applies only to<br />

Middle East tyrannies. Berman, like Christopher Hitchens, champions an<br />

“anti-totalitarian war” and, thus flatteringly framed, who but fools and tools<br />

of tyrants can object? The dark but distinct possibility that overtly noble wars<br />

really would be conducted according to realpolitik tenets and exploitative<br />

aims seems lost on Berman who likes to chide leftists who fret about<br />

“America’s imperial motives, about the greed of big corporations, and their<br />

influence in White House policy; and could not get beyond their worries.”<br />

Apparently after 9/11 no one was so depravedly partisan as to attach their<br />

own agenda to the security crisis for their own advantage. Pay no attention to<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Kurt Jacobsen<br />

the man behind the curtain, Berman admonishes, watch the impressive<br />

fireworks and shut up.<br />

Berman is wary of realists, too. Realists figure that “world politics is driven by<br />

wealth, power, and geography” (although a lot of realists overlook the role of<br />

wealth). While it may be unwise to start or end with realist precepts about<br />

power, one cannot ignore them, as Berman does, when examining how the<br />

world works. To characterize the first Gulf War as fought in defense of<br />

Muslims in Kuwait and Saudi Arabia is mad hatter logic—like saying the<br />

U.S. cavalry wiped out the Indians to protect Chinese coolies toiling on the<br />

railroads. In this same vein, Berman imagines that America sided with the<br />

Palestinans. He even quotes an Israeli negotiator lauding Clinton for doing<br />

more for the Palestinians than any one else. It’s rather like a participant<br />

praising the diplomatic feats of Chamberlain at Munich.<br />

Turning to Islam after a brief detour through Camus, Berman contends that<br />

“pan-Arabism and the philosophical roots of Europe’s right wing<br />

nationalisms were the same.” Islamic extremism (unlike other religious<br />

extremisms?) preaches utter obedience to an unrealizable ideal, and so<br />

generates totalitarianism. Totalitarianism and terror are the same. So terror,<br />

as defined by the White House, is totalitarian. Naturally, Berman exempts<br />

state-sponsored terrorism. All progress, he also says, depended on “a freedom<br />

that recognizes the existence of other freedoms too.” This sounds okay, but<br />

he blithely proceeds to applaud “the idea of progress toward ever more<br />

freedom, ever more rationality, ever more wealth”—as if these pursuits were<br />

not difficult to coordinate, or were not contradictory.<br />

To sustain the pretty notion that liberal democratic societies cannot do<br />

systematically illiberal things, he predictably taps a “heart of darkness”<br />

argument about King Leopold’s atrocities in the Congo. There, liberal<br />

colonialists, evidently demented by the primitive milieu, took up “murder for<br />

murders sake.” No, it was murder for profit’s sake. They operated in environs<br />

where it was expeditious to work natives to death to extract resources quickly.<br />

Liberals aren’t immune to such tempting incentives. Why that would be<br />

irrational. One would never guess when reading Berman that the simpleminded<br />

Western optimists of the nineteenth century, as he describes them,<br />

swiftly conquered 85% of the earth.<br />

Berman’s knowledge of Islam is, to say the least, shaky. He states: “Islamism<br />

got under way in Pakistan in the 1930s (organizationally in 1941),” when<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Kurt Jacobsen<br />

Pakistan was still only a flickering gleam in Jinnah’s eye. (Perhaps he means<br />

the Punjab, or part of it, but how did this get past the editors?) Pious<br />

people—one can be pious about a secular ideology too—are very scary<br />

critters mostly because their piety usually conceals nasty motives.<br />

Throughout the wobbly course of this book he writes as if religion or<br />

ideology alone dictates action, with no attention needed for underlying<br />

political or economic drives.<br />

Sayyid Qutb, Berman’s key Islamic figure, was a sort of Muslim Straussian,<br />

an elitist textual interpreter who spun out an Islam-based theory of<br />

alienation. Here was the very same siren song every cult belts out: we offer<br />

safe harbor in the bosum of Abraham or Allah or L. Ron Hubbard in<br />

exchange for every earthly thing you’ve got. Qutb blamed Socrates’ belief in<br />

reason for the ensuing split between materiality and spirit, which inflicted a<br />

“hideous schizophrenia” on poor humanity. Even so, Qtub had his lucid<br />

moments: as when remarking that John Foster Dulles “wants merely to<br />

mobilize a religiously-veneered patriotism that might protect the western<br />

order from communism.” The Saudis too were keen to keep their restive<br />

populace in line via importing Qutb’s severe brand of religion. The big<br />

question is how widespread is this doctrine?<br />

Berman says that the governing elite of Pakistan (presumably Zia) viewed<br />

Islamist fundamentalists as better neighbors than secular Marxist ones.<br />

(Washington certainly hoped so too, and dished out cash and arms<br />

accordingly.) Berman claims that Shariah law in Khomeini’s Iran after 1979<br />

“excited admiration and envy in the Arab and Muslim world.” If so, why was<br />

it not instituted in every Muslim majority state? Berman says that the<br />

Taliban were celebrated through the Islamic world.” Evidence, please. His<br />

whole case rests on the uniqueness of the Islamic fundamentalist threat. So he<br />

mentions Sadat’s assassination by a Muslim fundamentalist in 1981 but<br />

omits that of Rabin by a Jewish fundamentalist in 1994. Berman’s answer for<br />

all our worldly woes is “pathological mass movements.” This diagnosis allows<br />

him to remark on “communism morphing into nationalism” in former<br />

Yugoslavia without bothering to pry into the role that neo-liberal Western<br />

banks had in demolishing the federation in the first place.<br />

Berman scolds the sappy hand-wringing Left for being seduced by Stalin,<br />

Mao and Pol Pot—all of whom at one time or another were allied with the<br />

U.S. government (which, as we all know, was in thrall to sappy handwringing<br />

leftists). He then castigates a faction of 1930s French socialists for<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Kurt Jacobsen<br />

an imprudent anti-war stance but somehow fails to mention the French<br />

Right’s hearty slogan “Better Hitler than Blum.” He blandly compares peace<br />

demonstrations today to 1930s appeasers. Indeed, dissenters are pictured as<br />

nothing less than dyspeptic collaborators with the rabid Taliban whom the<br />

West subsequently did not so much bomb as bribe into submission. So those<br />

teeming Muslim fanatics know the value of a dollar after all which,<br />

perversely, is a hopeful sign. Nonetheless, Berman envisions a long “war<br />

between liberalism and the apocalyptic and phantasmagorical movements.”<br />

Noam Chomsky is pilloried for explaining “every last quirk of human<br />

behavior by invoking a tiny number of factors,” unlike, say, the professions of<br />

economics or sociology or political science. Berman, by contrast, narrows our<br />

buzzing, blooming confusion down tidily to one factor, those darned<br />

pathological mass movements. So he apparently believes that Pol Pot would<br />

have slouched toward Phnom Penh for his own inscrutable Oriental reasons,<br />

and without the midwivery of B-52 carpet bombing or bloody “incursions.”<br />

Nothing distresses Berman more than the fact that while American media<br />

sagely regard Chomsky as a “crank,” much of the rest of the planet treats him<br />

as a voice worth heeding. But what ultimately becomes crystal clear is that for<br />

Berman the whole planet now is pretty much a “pathological mass political<br />

movement” mobilizing irrationally to resist the liberal national interests of<br />

the United State, as ordained by born again George W. Bush.<br />

Kurt Jacobsen is research fellow in the Department of Political Science at the<br />

University of Chicago.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


T<br />

Jason Schulman<br />

Review<br />

Heaven on Earth: The Rise and Fall of Socialism<br />

by Joshua Muravchik<br />

reviewed by<br />

Jason Schulman<br />

here are, to be sure, intelligent right-wing critiques of socialism, as both<br />

concept and practice. Joshua Muravchik’s The Rise and Fall of Socialism,<br />

however, does not constitute such a critique. Its greatest failing is that it<br />

simply has nothing new to say, and as is to be expected, what it does have to<br />

say is largely wrong.<br />

Supposedly, Joshua Muravchik is to be taken seriously because he comes<br />

from a socialist family and he was the national chairman of the youth section<br />

of the Socialist Party, USA, from 1968 until 1973. But Muravchik’s SP was a<br />

quite different animal than it was in the days of Eugene V. Debs, dominated<br />

as it was by supporters of the Vietnam War. Anti-Communism had become<br />

the sole motivating factor for “socialists” of Muravchik’s stripe, hence their<br />

general move toward neoconservatism was perfectly predictable. Like his<br />

erstwhile comrades from the former SP (now inaccurately calling itself “Social<br />

Democrats USA”), Muravchik has moved from anti-Communism to a<br />

wholesale rejection of all strands of socialism. His understanding of<br />

“socialism” largely reduces it to a notion of state- (or communal colony-)<br />

driven social engineering to achieve earthly perfection. There have always<br />

been what the American Marxist Hal Draper called “the two souls of<br />

socialism”: that of “enlightened” elites autocratically seeking to create<br />

“rational” societies, and that of ordinary people working toward a world<br />

where all institutions are accountable and socially-produced wealth is<br />

democratically controlled by those who create it. Muravchik sees only elites,<br />

and the “other soul” of socialism is left unexamined. Do not expect to find an<br />

index entry for “workers’ self-management” in this book.<br />

Little of what Muravchik says about Gracchus Babeuf or Robert Owen is<br />

controversial. Babeuf, as Draper once wrote, spearheaded the idea of the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Jason Schulman<br />

Educational Dictatorship of benevolent anti-capitalists. Owen was also elitist,<br />

but Muravchik is considerably easier on him because he was a nonrevolutionary<br />

who “recognized that there was no need to seize power.<br />

Endowed with some land and capital, socialists could form their own<br />

communities.” Commenting on the failure of Owen’s utopian society, New<br />

Harmony—and, later in the book, the Israeli kibbutzim—Muravchik offers<br />

the traditional “socialism goes against human nature” canard: “If men were<br />

angels then an economy might succeed without selfish incentives, but if men<br />

were angels it would not matter whether the economy succeeded since they<br />

would have no material needs.” Whatever relevance this may have to the<br />

socialism of utopian colonists, it is irrelevant as a critique of political<br />

democratic socialism, which has always acknowledged the importance of<br />

“selfish” incentives under conditions of (relative) scarcity. Men and women<br />

are indeed not angels, and among capitalism’s problems is that it encourages<br />

them to be devils: the market encourages every individual to regard and treat<br />

all others as means to earn his or her living, just as it compels every firm to<br />

act as if it were the center of the universe, never mind the “externalities.”<br />

Muravchik’s analysis of Marx and Engels similarly lacks depth. Besides<br />

attributing the phrase “property is theft” to “Marxism”—it was the anarchist<br />

forefather Pierre Joseph-Proudhon who coined it—he rehashes the<br />

controversy of Marx’s use of anti-Semitic language, specifically the stereotype<br />

of Jews as merchant-hucksters. Muravchik fails to mention that the language<br />

of Part II of Marx’s On the Jewish Question followed the view of the Jews’ role<br />

given in an essay On the Money System which had just been written by Moses<br />

Hess, one of the progenitors of Zionism. Subsequent Zionists used similar<br />

phraseology. 1 Marx supported legal equality and civil rights for Jews; his<br />

analysis was that Jews were essentially a commercial class within medieval<br />

Europe, and the Jewish religion was an ideology reflecting the outlook of this<br />

class. While it is certainly true that Marx wrote terrible things in his personal<br />

letters to Engels, such as his derision of German socialist leader Ferdinand<br />

Lassalle as a “Jewish nigger,” even as he publicly opposed black slavery in the<br />

United States, this merely proves that Marx was, in fact, a nineteenth century<br />

European. There was nothing anti-Semitic in the politics of Marx and<br />

Engels—unless one considers atheism to be objectively anti-Semitic, and even<br />

then, Marx opposed the attempt by Mikhail Bakunin and his followers to<br />

make atheism an official doctrine of the International Workingmen’s<br />

Association. Whatever Marx’s personal failings, the movement that took his<br />

name was in no way anti-Semitic. August Bebel famously attacked anti-<br />

Semitism as “the socialism of fools”; Karl Kautsky denounced New<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Jason Schulman<br />

Testament authors for demonizing the Jews and inciting hatred against them<br />

as the murderers of Christ in his book, The Foundations of Christianity; Lenin<br />

wrote “it is not the Jews who are the enemies of the working people” but “the<br />

capitalists of all countries.” 2<br />

Muravchik claims that Marx and Engels “reconnected socialism to the thrill<br />

of violence”—as if they ever supported violence for its own sake, or ever said<br />

that countries which were sufficiently democratic and non-militarized might<br />

achieve socialism by peaceful means. He dismisses Capital as “ponderous”<br />

and “blather”; one wonders what the noted conservative economist Joseph<br />

Schumpeter saw in it. (Of course, Schumpeter could understand the<br />

difference between use-value and exchange-value; Muravchik is confounded<br />

by such stuff. Then again, he terms class struggle to be “high theory,” i.e., not<br />

real.)<br />

He attacks the duo for seeing themselves as “leaders of the proletariat”—<br />

never part of Marx and Engels’s self-description—despite their lack of<br />

working class roots. Indeed, this is a frequent theme in Muravchik’s book:<br />

real workers always become, at the most, reformist social democrats, while<br />

revolutionaries are always from the affluent classes (this former member of<br />

the American SP seems to know nothing of Eugene Debs’s background) and<br />

socialism itself is ultimately an ideology imported into the working class by<br />

intellectuals from outside it. Irony of ironies, Muravchik’s view is a sort of<br />

inverted Trotskyism: it is socialism, not ordinary reformism, which represents<br />

the influence of “alien class forces” on the proletariat! Missing in all this is<br />

any acknowledgement of the commitment by Marx and Engels to “winning<br />

the battle of democracy,” as The Communist Manifesto puts it, or any<br />

examination of their role in transforming socialism from a doctrine of<br />

wealthy colony-founders and secret conspirators to a doctrine of workingclass<br />

self-emancipation from exploitation. A serious critique of Marx and<br />

Engels would comment on their real flaws: their denigration of the role of<br />

moral values and individual rights in promoting socialist goals and their<br />

belief that an abundant communist society would transcend the need to<br />

deliberate politically about its economic priorities. Instead, Muravchik merely<br />

offers the conservative same-old same-old.<br />

Muravchik is far nicer to Eduard Bernstein, who embraced the goals of<br />

“more political and social legislation, better pay and working conditions”<br />

while abandoning the idea of a socialist “final goal.” While in retrospect,<br />

Bernstein’s rejection of orthodox Marxist teleology was correct, the ultimate<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Jason Schulman<br />

result of the logic of Bernstein’s politics has lately been turned against its own<br />

reformist ends. For if the logic of Bernsteinian social democracy has been, as<br />

<strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong> puts it, “the achievement of incremental reforms<br />

through calculable compromises with the party as broker,” 3 the role of social<br />

democracy is now, in our age of capitalist globalization, at best to polish the<br />

sharpest edges of corporate power—a role embraced by Tony Blair, whom<br />

Muravchik praises as an “undertaker” of socialism. Similarly, Clement Atlee<br />

gets off easy because he was a gradualist social democrat, though still deluded<br />

about the ostensible benefits of public ownership. The difficulties of the Atlee<br />

government and, decades later, the sudden about-face of the radical-reformist<br />

Mitterand government of France supposedly illustrate the folly of socialist<br />

interference in the market. In reality, they are simply examples of the<br />

perennial dilemma that socialist governments face: the specter of capital<br />

flight, the constraints imposed by the need for continued private investment.<br />

The twentieth century’s exemplar of the radical-democratic “other soul” of<br />

socialism, Rosa Luxemburg, is dismissed by Muravchik as a “child of<br />

privilege” whose mantra was “the spontaneity of the masses,” an oft-stated<br />

myth. Lenin, of course, is demonized, and while Lenin’s thought and<br />

political practice deserves sharp criticism, Muravchik mostly offers the<br />

traditional fallacies, claiming that the Bolshevik revolution was a mere coup<br />

d’etat and attributing all its tragedies to Leninism’s innate evil and nothing to<br />

the civil war in which the Bolsheviks were fighting a full scale invasion by<br />

fourteen different states. 4 Lenin—who supposedly ordered “tens of thousands<br />

of deaths,” though no proof is offered—gets blamed not only for Stalinism<br />

but also for fascism because of his supposed similarities with Mussolini, a<br />

former member of the Italian Socialist Party; the Fascists supposedly believed<br />

themselves the “true heirs” of Lenin despite their anti-Marxism. Muravchik<br />

goes so far as to claim that “Mussolini’s rule rested far more on popular<br />

support than Lenin’s.” All he proves in his chapter on fascism is that the<br />

“logic” of anti-internationalist anti-capitalism leads in fascist directions. 5 And<br />

while few will disagree with Muravchik’s assessment of the bureaucraticallydirected<br />

“African socialism” of the late Tanzanian president Julius Nyerere,<br />

he takes no notice that even Tanzania has suffered much less than some of its<br />

neighbors who never strayed from the World Bank/IMF orthodoxy, such as<br />

Rwanda and Burundi. The “free market” has devastated postcolonial Africa.<br />

Capitalism has failed Africa as surely as has “Ujamaa.”<br />

The heroes of Muravchik’s book are Samuel Gompers and George Meany,<br />

for their role in making America “impervious to socialism.” “Pure and simple<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Jason Schulman<br />

unionism,” Gompers style, supposedly represented “true” trade unionism<br />

uncorrupted by middle-class socialist intellectuals who cared nothing for<br />

“meliorating the immediate conditions of the workers.” The historic<br />

opposition of Gompers’s American Federation of Labor to the inclusion of<br />

women, blacks, Mexican Americans, Chinese Americans, or most unskilled<br />

laborers in the labor movement is ignored, as is the autocratic nature of the<br />

unionism that he consolidated. Meany is praised for being an enthusiastic<br />

Cold Warrior who purged Communists from American unions and<br />

“rid[ding] the movement of racial discrimination.” The truth is that Meany<br />

opposed the historic March on Washington in 1963, and whatever efforts he<br />

did put toward anti-racist measures—such as lobbying for the 1965 Civil<br />

Rights Bill—were done in order to stave off criticisms for having done little<br />

in the past; he was far more interested in fighting Communists (and left<br />

critics) than fighting racists. Muravchik, of course, identifies with Meany’s<br />

support of the Vietnam War and his animosity toward the peace movement<br />

(Meany once denounced peaceniks as “fags”). He glosses over the merger of<br />

the foreign operations of the AFL-CIO with the counterintelligence sections<br />

of the CIA and their reactionary consequences both in Latin America and at<br />

home. He repeats the falsehood that Meany molded the labor movement<br />

“into a mighty force in American life.”<br />

The truth is that, as Paul Buhle writes, labor’s support for U.S. imperialism<br />

“paid virtually all of its [job-creating] benefits in the short run, and to a<br />

relatively select proportion of working people. Rather than reproducing<br />

union loyalty, the defense-linked rise of Sun Belt industry created large<br />

pockets of white working class conservatism, just as big-ticket construction of<br />

suburbs reinforced racial boundaries and in several different ways greatly<br />

diminished prospects of union democracy. The environmental recklessness of<br />

everything-for-production, taken with hypocritical race policies and a<br />

staggering indifference to the expanding clerical (especially female) sectors of<br />

the workforce, made the labor movement increasingly unpalatable and<br />

unsuccessful as time went on.” 6 The weakness of the U.S. labor movement<br />

today is the legacy of Cold War business unionism. To this, Muravchik is<br />

indifferent; it is, after all, working class conservatism that he supports, or<br />

more precisely working class support for the “American counter-model” to<br />

socialism. As the Stalinists of yesteryear saw the USSR or China as the<br />

Vanguard Country, so Muravchik sees America as the Vanguard, the envy of<br />

the world. No, America has “not always been loved,” but its imperialism is<br />

only “supposed.” Given how many people around the world currently see the<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Jason Schulman<br />

U.S. as the world’s main danger to peace, the publication of such comments<br />

could not have been more ill timed.<br />

Muravchik sees the dying out of the Israeli kibbutzim as the final nail in<br />

socialism’s coffin. But the kibbutzim, regardless of their adoption of the<br />

formula “to each according to their needs” (an impossibility under conditions<br />

of scarcity) or adoption of communal childrearing (not much of a priority<br />

outside of utopian colonies), were hardly pure institutions. In 1964, ninetytwo<br />

percent of kibbutzim were affiliated to companies which sold goods<br />

produced for a profit. This profit ended up in the hands of companies such as<br />

Koor (a major company of construction and manufacturing company) and<br />

AMPAL (American Israel Corporation, a finance company that directed U.S.<br />

capital investment in Israel), not Israeli workers. During the 1960s, more<br />

than fifty percent of kibbutz labor was wage labor, not voluntary labor, with<br />

the “dirty jobs” performed by foreign Jewish volunteers. This is not to<br />

mention the kibbutzim’s role in helping the Haganah army to drive out Arab<br />

inhabitants who had not already fled, confiscating their land, and later<br />

destroying the remaining houses—not exactly behavior exemplifying<br />

proletarian internationalism. 7 And the increasing social inequality in Israel,<br />

mirroring that in the U.S., goes unmentioned by Muravchik.<br />

Muravchik’s book ends with a return to the theme of socialism-as-religion,<br />

stating that in contrast to traditional religion, socialism “lacks any internal<br />

code of conduct to limit what believers may do. The socialist narrative turned<br />

history into a morality play without the morality.” Democratic socialism, he<br />

says, is a contradiction in terms; socialism is inevitably coercive. Of course,<br />

capitalism is coercive—it is based upon the coercion of market forces, backed<br />

up by state power. History has shown that capitalism is compatible with the<br />

most coercive possible governments, including ones that claim to be<br />

“socialist.” Capitalism is itself innately authoritarian. But the whole point of<br />

socialism, when it has not been hijacked by authoritarians, is not the elite<br />

engineering of the “New Man,” but the full democratization of political and<br />

economic power; indeed, the end of power itself as the organizing principle<br />

of social life. 8 This is the core of the “other soul” of socialism. It is still worth<br />

fighting for.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Jason Schulman<br />

Notes<br />

1 See Hal Draper, “Marx and the Economic-Jew Stereotype,” in Karl Marx’s<br />

Theory of Revolution, Vol.1: State and Bureaucracy (New York: Monthly<br />

Review Press, 1977), pp. 591-608.<br />

2 V.I. Lenin, Collected Works, Vol. 29 (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1972) p.<br />

252.<br />

3 <strong>Stephen</strong> <strong>Eric</strong> <strong>Bronner</strong>, Socialism Unbound, 2nd Edition (Boulder: Westview<br />

Press, 2000), p. 65.<br />

4 “With the country isolated within the international community, facing<br />

economic collapse and internal revolts, it was no wonder that the Bolsheviks<br />

should have become obsessed with unity, discipline, economic efficiency, and<br />

the administrative centralization of power.” <strong>Bronner</strong>, ibid., pp. 96-97.<br />

5 Muravchik argues that Nazism did not differ from traditional socialisms in<br />

its “virulence against despised peoples,” citing Marx’s desire for the<br />

“annihilation” of “Croats, Pandurs, Czechs and similar scum.” The context<br />

of those comments is the revolutionary upsurge of 1848, when on the<br />

promise of national autonomy (limited self-government)—and with the<br />

backing of Tsarist Russia—the Czechs, Croats, Slovenians and Ukrainians<br />

sided with the Hapsburg monarchy to smash the revolts of the Polish and<br />

Hungarian nationalists and the democrats of Vienna. Marx and Engels<br />

opposed the “principle of nationalities” (promulgated by Napoleon) as a<br />

doctrine that falsely claimed that all nations had the equal historical,<br />

geographical, political and industrial conditions for a viable independence.<br />

This doctrine was being used to justify the division and occupation of Poland<br />

and to incite the Serbs, Croats, Ukrainians, Slovaks, and Czechs. Marx and<br />

Engels supported the right of the great European nations to independence,<br />

but nationalities that were not struggling against imperial rule could claim no<br />

such right. They would never become nations and embark upon their own<br />

path of independent democratic development. Instead, civilization would be<br />

imposed on them by the great historic nations. A Darwinian view, perhaps,<br />

but not analogous to Nazi doctrine.<br />

6 Paul Buhle, Taking Care of Business: Samuel Gompers, George Meany, Lane<br />

Kirkland, and the Tragedy of American Labor (New York: Monthly Review<br />

Press, 1999), p. 2.<br />

7 See Benny Morris, The Birth of the Palestinian Refugee Problem (Cambridge:<br />

Cambridge University Press, 1987).<br />

8 This is how Ralph Miliband puts it in Socialism for a Sceptical Age (London:<br />

Verso, 1995), p. 57.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Jason Schulman<br />

Jason Schulman is a Ph. D. student in Political Science at the Graduate Center,<br />

CUNY.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


I<br />

Desmond Macnamara<br />

Review<br />

Why Orwell Matters<br />

By Christopher Hitchens<br />

Reviewed by<br />

Desmond Macnamara<br />

t might be best, before considering this book, to read something<br />

Christopher Hitchens wrote earlier this spring as the Iraq invasion loomed:<br />

There will be no war. There will be a fairly brief<br />

and ruthless military intervention. The President<br />

will give an order. The attack will be rapid,<br />

accurate and dazzling. It will be greeted by the<br />

majority of the Iraqi people as an emancipation”<br />

Possibly Hitchens makes no claim as a military strategist, though some might<br />

feel that such a dubious prophecy might call into question his attempt at an<br />

appraisal of George Orwell’s inner beliefs and motives. One can only imagine<br />

what Orwell would say about current events, but it is difficult to imagine<br />

Orwell backing Hitchens, Bush and Blair in that affair. Orwell died in 1950<br />

and most of his celebrated works were based on events leading to the brink of<br />

the Cold War—a very different era from present days of woe. <strong>Eric</strong> Arthur<br />

Blair (George Orwell) came from a family of British colonial civil servants<br />

“serving” in Bengal (his father worked for the Opium Department of the<br />

government of India) in the unanticipated twilight of the empire, an<br />

institution that started to bleed steadily after the 1916 uprising in Dublin.<br />

As a child, young Blair, as was the custom, was shipped home from India to<br />

England (not Scotland, as his name suggests: Perthsire is full of Blairs: Blair<br />

Gowrie, Blair Athol and so forth) for an education. He very properly was<br />

installed in a public school, those expensive and very unpublic forcing-beds<br />

of empire and Latin verbs, where the White Man’s Burden was laid on the<br />

shoulders of the whitest of white flannels on the cricket field. The best<br />

educated (or the best connected) formed the administration for successive<br />

governments which presided over palm and pine.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Desmond Macnamara<br />

There were exceptions emerging from such highfalutin institutions, of course:<br />

liberals and finally socialists, a valiant though mixed lot, some of whom<br />

claimed Orwell as one of their own. After public school, Blair joined the<br />

Burmese Police, the bigoted cruelties and mindset of which drove him<br />

rapidly back to Europe. A rather notorious event (and essay) involving the<br />

shooting of a rogue elephant led to his resignation and utter rejection of<br />

imperialism. This anti-imperialist and anti-authoritarian mode remained<br />

with him until his tragic early death and underlaid his staunch socialist<br />

beliefs. It also determined his later detestation of Stalinism (begun during the<br />

Spanish Civil War in Barcelona, but also, one supposes, his earlier doubts<br />

about Trotskyism, despite his connections with the PUOM in Spain in<br />

1936). By this time, <strong>Eric</strong> Blair had morphed promisingly into George<br />

Orwell.<br />

He resolutely embarked on an examination of society’s outcasts which<br />

resulted in Down and Out in London and Paris, which would make you never<br />

want to work or dine out in a posh restaurant again, and then The Road to<br />

Wigan Pier, considering the unemployed wasteland of northern England.<br />

The pier ordinarily is a symbol of English seaside gaiety. Being inland, Wigan<br />

had no pier, only junctions of derelict canals built in a bygone era of<br />

prosperity. Keep the Aspidistra Flying opened the lid on the lower middle<br />

classes, exposing their poverty of thought and their pretensions to<br />

respectability. (A lamentable condition also to be found in some areas of the<br />

solid, securely employed workers.)<br />

When it finally appeared in 1945 after rejections, according to Orwell, by<br />

four publishers, Animal Farm raised the ire of those (including most people<br />

in wartime Britain) who hailed our gallant Soviet allies at Stalingrad, and the<br />

outcry even led to calls for its banning. Imagine that. Published a few years<br />

later, 1984 was never intended as a satire on socialism, as conservative<br />

commentators smugly would have it, but as a bleak caricature of an overregulated<br />

dictatorial society, whatever the “ism” underlying it. The book<br />

depicted a drab world, heavily administered with a ration of one egg and two<br />

pieces of cheese a week, unrationed whale steak and a morsel of meat. The<br />

future offered no flicker of light or hope, and words had all degenerated into<br />

the stuff of slogans. The post-Yalta world of zones and euphemism seemed to<br />

a dying tubercular man an era of unconscionable doublespeak.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Desmond Macnamara<br />

Hitchens structures his book into separate essays rather than chronological<br />

chapters: Orwell on empire, on Englishness, on English medieval heritage, on<br />

the left and right, on America and on feminism. In the course of this<br />

judicious categorizing of Orwell’s vision of splendors and frailties, he is<br />

portrayed, in Hitchens’s rendering, as a slightly cantankerous gentlemen from<br />

the Shires who soon turns upside down the conventional Tory assumptions<br />

with which he was overladen. Orwell becomes an unapologetic socialist of<br />

perceptive honesty who nonetheless rejected anything inconsistent with his<br />

own views and standards. It earned him enemies, and earned him praise from<br />

some of those whom he would have despised.<br />

Every essay stands alone; joined only by Hitchens’s analysis of Orwell’s<br />

beliefs as descried in his writing. Understandably, there is a multitude of<br />

judgments trotted out here to be embraced or disdained. On the question of<br />

Orwell’s attitude to women, for example, Hitchens is absolutely right. The<br />

women in his novels are dull, unimaginative and universally unintellectual,<br />

although his late marriage to an Irish woman may have been a mercifully<br />

happy one.<br />

This year is the 100th anniversary of Orwell’s birth, and new books are<br />

appearing. Thomas Pynchon has produced a biography and an intriguing tale<br />

of espionage is added to the Orwell history after sixty years, by Gordon<br />

Bowker. Hitchens, however, is more concerned with Orwell’s oeuvre and<br />

attitudes than with biographical details and Catalonian adventures. Orwell<br />

too was an essayist and, interestingly, another still widely read essayist is<br />

being celebrated in London this spring. William Hazlitt’s tombstone has just<br />

been re-erected in London’s Soho. Both men inspired later writers as well as<br />

generations of appreciative readers. Neither was an academic—indeed,<br />

Hazlitt despised academics. Perhaps donnish attitudes were more aridly<br />

classical in his day. But Orwell was a writer and journalist and chose<br />

(unhappily for him, happily for us) the Burmese police force to transform his<br />

view of the world. Why Orwell Matters is a lively guide to Orwell’s thought<br />

and personality. The treatment of the subjects in the essays is always<br />

interesting and generally acceptable, even if the some of the author’s recent<br />

activities may not seem so. The latter need not, in all instances, affect the<br />

former.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Desmond Macnamara<br />

Desmond MacNamara Irish-born, is a retired lecturer in art, a sculptor, and<br />

author of five books, including The Book of Intrusions (Dalkey Archive Press,<br />

1994). He has written for the New Statesman, The Tablet, Studies: An Irish<br />

Quarterly Review and other periodicals. Several works are on display in the Irish<br />

National Gallery and National Writer's Museum in Dublin.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


J<br />

Diana Judd<br />

Review<br />

Straw Dogs by John Gray<br />

Reviewed by<br />

Diana Judd<br />

ohn Gray has a bone to pick. His latest book, Straw Dogs, takes aim at a<br />

host of targets in what appears to be a wholesale deconstruction of human<br />

thought. Religion, humanism, philosophy, belief in progress (indeed, belief<br />

in anything), industrialization, even civilization itself has, according to Gray,<br />

kept us from realizing our true nature: that we are just one more species of<br />

animal. And since “other animals do not need a purpose in life . . . can we<br />

not think of the aim of life as being simply to see?”<br />

In two hundred pages of text, Gray never explains what this means. Instead,<br />

the reader is treated to an array of disconnected quotations from Aristotle to<br />

Zarathustra, none of which serve to illustrate a coherent argument. Straw<br />

Dogs does contain moments where important topics such as the environment<br />

and the idea of progress, the future of genetic engineering and its effect on<br />

humanity, and the underlying philosophies of western and eastern religions<br />

are raised. Yet Gray merely dabbles on the surface of these issues (each of<br />

which would require a separate volume to explore), content merely to<br />

mention their existence. The end result is an incoherent book which goes<br />

nowhere and says very little. Gray’s final message—that humanity’s purpose<br />

in life should be “simply to see,” yet the human animal “cannot do with out a<br />

purpose,” is at best anti-climatic and at worst a failure to tie together its<br />

preceding chapters.<br />

The book is a string of aphorisms, each varying wildly in both length and<br />

subject matter. No doubt Gray was influenced by such works as Nietzsche’s<br />

Human, All Too Human and Adorno’s Minima Moralia, but Straw Dogs lacks<br />

both the depth and coherence that characterize those two works. What’s<br />

more, his aphoristic format seems forced. Gray states in his acknowledgments<br />

that though his thoughts are presented in “fragments,” they are not<br />

unsystematic. He also writes that the aphorisms may either be read in<br />

sequence or “dipped into at will.” Whatever his intentions, the overall effect<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Diana Judd<br />

of his schema is a nearly random flitting from topic to topic, his thoughts<br />

never alighting long enough to explore any one of them in useful detail.<br />

Gray’s book contains many inconsistencies and contradictions. Among the<br />

most egregious is his treatment of science. On the one hand, Gray states that<br />

“the origins of science are not in rational inquiry but in faith, magic and<br />

trickery,” while on the other hand he equates science with technology, from<br />

which, according to Gray, its power flows. While he does not go so far as to<br />

declare that technology is trickery or magic, the implication is clear.<br />

Furthermore, his stance that the origins of science lie in magic and trickery<br />

while its success lies in superior rhetoric betrays a fundamental<br />

misunderstanding of the history and philosophy of science. It is rather<br />

surprising that a professor of European Thought at the London School of<br />

Economics would so thoroughly neglect both Francis Bacon and Rene<br />

Descartes.<br />

Another inconsistency lies in Gray’s extensive usage of quotations from both<br />

western and eastern philosophy to buttress his argument that philosophy is so<br />

much bunk obscuring the truth about humanity. In addition, he continually<br />

references Darwin (without once explaining the actual theory of evolution)<br />

and recent advances in genetic research to illustrate his point that humans are<br />

merely animals and should consider themselves as such, while at the same<br />

time relentlessly decrying science and its origins. Apparently, Gray believes<br />

that neither Darwin’s theory of evolution nor genetic research fall under the<br />

rubric of science, or for that matter, philosophy as he understands it.<br />

All in all, Straw Dogs is a confusing book with no useful underlying message.<br />

While Gray does at times raise some interesting and controversial topics, his<br />

treatment of them is too brief and shallow to justify a serious perusal of the<br />

work. No doubt Gray intended Straw Dogs to be a work of popular<br />

philosophy and not an academic offering. It is a shame that he thinks the<br />

former must be characterized by inconsistency, contradiction, and<br />

superficiality.<br />

Diana Judd received her Ph. D. in Political Science from Rutgers University.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


D<br />

Robert J. Antonio<br />

Review<br />

The Spector of Democracy<br />

by Dick Howard<br />

Reviewed by<br />

Robert J. Antonio<br />

ick Howard’s The Spector of Democracy is composed primarily of recent<br />

essays revised for this volume. They express ideas that he has been<br />

developing for about three decades. Cutting a broad swath, he critically<br />

explores the relations between theory, history, and politics. The essays reflect<br />

his intellectual journey—his early engagements with Marx, the Frankfurt<br />

School, and, especially, Claude Lefort and Cornelius Castoriadis, his later<br />

works on politics, political judgment, and French and American political<br />

history, and his current ideas about Marx and political theory after<br />

communism. Howard’s post-Marxist theoretical argument provides a<br />

connective thread in the loosely integrated essays. He states that re-engaging<br />

Marx is timely in a “post-1989 world that wants to replace political choice by<br />

submission to the ‘natural necessity’ of the market.” 1 He contends that Marx’s<br />

effort to conjure up proletarian revolutionary subjectivity from technical<br />

progress and economic crisis has a similar “antipolitical” thrust. Howard (p.<br />

10) holds that “Marx was essentially a philosopher,” but that his attempt to<br />

radically historicize Hegelianism, translating it into a materialist theory of<br />

historical rationality and social progress, subordinated his philosophical critique<br />

of alienation to a deterministic “sociology.” 2 According to Howard, Marx’s<br />

practice of “philosophy by other means”obscured the normative nature of his<br />

critique, conflated the realm of freedom with necessity, and blinded him to the<br />

“democratic political implications of his own analysis” (emphasis in the original).<br />

Howard attempts to execute a complicated theoretical maneuver; he criticizes<br />

Marx’s sociological reduction of politics in order to recover the “philosophical<br />

Marx” and, then, ultimately go beyond him “to open the path to politics” and<br />

democracy that he sees to be absent in Marx (p. xiii).<br />

Howard acknowledges considerable debt to Lefort and Castoriadis, devoting<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

several chapters to their ideas and employing them throughout the book.<br />

Increasingly skeptical about communism after the suppressed 1956 Hungarian<br />

revolt, they and others in the Socialisme ou Barbarie circle declared the<br />

autonomy of politics from economic determination, engaged new forms of<br />

protest that went beyond class, and brought to the foreground communist<br />

repression, which generally had been ignored by the French left. As Howard<br />

explains, Lefort and Castoriadis saw Hegelian historicism to be a root of<br />

Marx’s reductive claim that progressive development of the mode of<br />

production leads inevitably to emancipation. Rather than an advance over<br />

Hegelian idealism, they argued, his materialism grants pseudohistorical<br />

necessity to contingent historical processes. Stressing an affinity for<br />

totalitarianism, they held that Marx’s historicism has been deployed by<br />

communist regimes and parties to justify the suppression of political<br />

opposition. Howard shares their view that Marxism neutralizes its own<br />

democratic political potentiality and that realization of it requires a radical<br />

break with historicism and a new openness to history.<br />

Howard also agrees with Lefort’s definition of the political as the “symbolic<br />

institution of society,” or creation and reproduction of the normative bases of<br />

societal institutions. Lefort held that pre-existing hierarchical societies limited<br />

these symbolic practices to élites, who fashioned “external or transcendent”<br />

religious and metaphysical legitimations to justify their dominance. As<br />

Howard explains, he argued that democracy seeks “unity from within” society<br />

and expects its “members to take responsibility for their own individuality.”<br />

Lefort held that democracy arose when the ancien régime collapsed and citizens<br />

asserted the “right to have rights,” or the right to demand from the state<br />

recognition of their individual rights. He portrayed democracy as a plural<br />

“public space” where diverse citizens and groups, empowered by their rights,<br />

engage in open-ended, historically-variable deliberations. In his view, the<br />

consequent “radical indeterminacy” rules out unified publics and determination<br />

by general social conditions. However, Lefort contended that these<br />

reductionist ideas are products of modern ideologies, which arise to ease<br />

uncertainty and mask contingency. For example, liberalism’s claims about a<br />

rational self-interested subject and the inevitable operations of “market forces”<br />

provide a sense a certainty about liberal society’s foundations that discourage<br />

consideration of political alternatives. Lefort believed that an independent,<br />

open civil society is the best bulwark against the ideological reflex’s antipolitics.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

Following Lefort, Howard holds that Marx’s sociological reduction and vision<br />

of materially-driven proletarian unity deny politics’ discursive, contingent<br />

nature and that these historicist ideas, combined with Marx’s highly negative<br />

view of civil society and liberal rights, constitutes a proto-totalitarian ideology<br />

(pp. 77-80, 116-18,166, 209-10, 327, note 10).<br />

Howard states that Castoriadis acknowledged that “Marx bet on history and<br />

lost” (i.e., his hopes about the emancipatory proletariat failed). Howard<br />

implies, however, that Castoriadis still carried on the Marxist project to<br />

transcend Hegelianism with the understanding that it required a much more<br />

radical break than Marx was willing to make. Howard shares Castoriadis’s goal<br />

of moving beyond historicist teleology to a position recognizing history’s<br />

uniqueness, autonomy, and contingency (pp. 87-88). By contrast, Howard<br />

argues, the Frankfurt School failed to make this decisive post-Marxist, post-<br />

Hegelian move and, when their revolutionary hopes crashed, they sought<br />

aesthetic transcendence and rejected “everyday politics” (pp.39-41). Howard<br />

speculates that their deeply pessimistic vision of consumer capitalism’s<br />

seamlessly integrated, depoliticized, “one-dimensional” culture helped inspire<br />

later postmodernist claims about the end of modernity and exhaustion of<br />

politics. In his view, this “antipolitics” or “politics of theory” manifest<br />

constricted political vision, rather than politics’ actual demise. Howard<br />

explains his youthful affiliation with Telos, stressing the initial trouble that he<br />

had getting that formerly left journal, which was then still operating in Marx’s<br />

tracks, to take up Lefort and Castoriadis. He did not mention, however, that<br />

the editor and his inner circle, at that time, posed an extreme version of the<br />

one-dimensionality thesis portraying a near total closure of historical<br />

contradictions and of immanent possibilities for progressive change. This view<br />

not only anticipated pessimistic forms of postmodernism, but the Telos inner<br />

circle’s consequent search for organic community led them to take up Carl<br />

Schmitt in the 1980s and, after, to make an anti-liberal, neopopulist turn.<br />

Howard devotes considerable attention to historical comparison of French and<br />

American political cultures. He holds that the framers of the French republican<br />

regime had to pose a new conception of unity to replace the old monarchy’s<br />

lost integration. Faced with the problem of fragmentation, Howard contends,<br />

they envisioned a republican state reviving political unity. He argues that the<br />

framers of the new French regime stressed inclusion at the national level,<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

calling for universal citizenship and state action to insure social and political<br />

rights and to secure social equality. By contrast, he explains, engaging a setting<br />

that lacked the ancien régime’s cultural and political unity, American framers<br />

forged a vision of a self-managed democracy that is composed of diverse<br />

communities and individuals and that secures inclusion through free<br />

association and minimal reliance on state power. He holds that adoption of<br />

judicial autonomy and competitive political parties made clear that rights had<br />

to be won and defended politically. Howard embraces American “republican<br />

democracy,” which he sees to be inherently pluralist, open, and dynamic, while<br />

he implies that the state-centered French “democratic republic” is prone to the<br />

sociological reduction and proto-totalitarian singularity that he says inheres in<br />

Marxism. Still, he argues that American democracy may also express<br />

antipolitical tendencies; e.g., its emphasis on individual rights can degenerate<br />

into a “procedural republic” manifesting “right over good,” legal formality, and<br />

social fragmentation. In his view, the republican idea in France as well as in the<br />

United States is “political” rather than “socio-economic” and, thus, can be<br />

employed critically against the sociological reduction and collective subjects<br />

(pp. 174, 184). Howard’s historical accounts of French and American<br />

republicanism are too complex to adequately summarize here. However, their<br />

unifying thread is emphatic critique of the reduction of discursively-mediated<br />

political action to general sociological contexts and fictive collective subjects,<br />

which he implies deprive politics of their historical particularity and complex,<br />

dynamic, plural, dispersed agency.<br />

Howard speaks briefly about a totalizing “politics of will” that posits—<br />

independent of political action—a “right thing to be done” and a “unified<br />

actor” to do it and about an opposed “politics of judgement” that reflects<br />

critically on the consequences of political action and acts prudently. Stressing<br />

the need to take “responsibility” for political decision, which the politics of<br />

will abjures, Howard suggests that the politics of judgement suffuse republican<br />

democracy and his own analyses (pp. 18-22, 30, 78, 74, 107, 194-96). He also<br />

mentions in passing Max Weber’s related “ethics of conviction” and “ethics of<br />

responsibility” (p. 236). These concepts were part of Weber’s broader posttraditional<br />

argument about political responsibility, which rejected ideas of<br />

historical necessity and collective subjects and the consequent aversion of<br />

political decision. Moreover, Weber warned that fanatical forms of conviction<br />

suspend ethical reflection as well as political prudence, justifying extreme<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

control, violence, and repression and giving rise to the total state. Addressing<br />

Weber might have prompted Howard to clarify his concepts of politics of will<br />

and politics of judgment, which are central to his argument, but are left<br />

unelaborated. John Dewey’s radical democratic theory also seems to converge<br />

at key points with Howard’s project. Dewey stressed democracy’s uncertain,<br />

plural, discursive, historically particular, incomplete, experimental nature. He<br />

aimed to fashion a radically historicist, antifoundationalist democratic<br />

alternative to Hegelian historicism that breaks as fundamentally from modern<br />

ideas of historical necessity as it does from traditional metaphysics, religion,<br />

and political philosophy. Also, Dewey posed his mature social theory contra<br />

totalitarianism—Fascism and Stalinism. Engaging Dewey critically also might<br />

have sharpened Howard’s argument. However, his failure to address these<br />

particular thinkers is not problematic per se. Rather, the problem is that he<br />

does not situate adequately his theory relative to related political theories and<br />

social theories. Developing this theoretical context would have helped Howard<br />

bring forward more clearly and completely his overall position on democracy<br />

and its connections to current historical and political contexts.<br />

Howard’s unqualified claims about the “autonomy” and “radical<br />

indeterminacy” of politics and negative comments about “the flat terrain of<br />

sociology” and the “mere sociologist” (pp. 77, 81) draw an overly sharp<br />

boundary between politics and its “sociological” contexts. Exaggerating the<br />

threat of sociological reduction, he largely ignores the interdependence between<br />

these relatively autonomous spheres. Moreover, he does not distinguish the<br />

pseudo-sociology employed in bogus historicist arguments from genuine<br />

sociological inquiry about conditions that influence the direction and content<br />

of politics. He recognizes passingly that sociological analysis may have a<br />

limited role in normative critique, but he does not explain that role and, being<br />

very wary of the “totalitarian temptation,” he asserts that such analysis easily<br />

turns reductive (p. 134). He also implies that a sociological moment in<br />

normative critique would be positivist, suggesting the kind of disembodied<br />

eye, oblivious to normative conditioning of social inquiry, that thinkers like<br />

Weber and Dewey dismissed early last century. By contrast, Howard does not<br />

acknowledge that philosophy, which he strongly privileges in political critique,<br />

may need a sociological moment to avert the very tendency “to fly above<br />

reality” that he attributes to positivism. Strong claims about autonomy may<br />

inhere in efforts to make radical breaks from powerful constraints, but these<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

moves still manifest the sociological context. Lefort’s and Castoriadis’s<br />

emphatic claims about autonomy and indeterminacy make sense in light of<br />

their effort to break politically, intellectually, and even personally from post-<br />

World War II communism and from its patently constrained politics and<br />

sterile deterministic theories. However, this context has faded long ago. Today,<br />

politically ambiguous Schmitteans and populists as well as “New Right”<br />

proto-fascists make similar strong claims about the autonomy of politics and<br />

attack sociological reduction in their critiques of globalization and<br />

neoliberalism. Howard surely opposes such positions, but the context of his<br />

own work is not clear and he does not explain its political relevance.<br />

Howard recognizes the problem. He says that he does “not want to leave the<br />

impression that the theoretical arguments presented here have no immediate<br />

political implications,” and he invites readers to his website to sample some of<br />

his recent “directly political” commentaries, which he says illustrate his<br />

“understanding of democracy as radical.” I accepted his invitation, but his<br />

many well-reasoned points about the American political climate in the wake of<br />

9/11 do not clarify the political direction of his overall argument and,<br />

especially, why it should be construed to be an extension of Marx or to be<br />

radically democratic. Howard analyzes how historicism and sociological<br />

reduction contribute to de-politicization and de-democratization, but he<br />

explains neither the current relevance of his strong claims about autonomy nor<br />

his overall substantive vision of democracy. Like Dewey, he stresses an affinity<br />

between historicism and democracy, but, by contrast to Dewey, he does not<br />

offer tools for a critique of “really existing” democracy—e.g., to evaluate<br />

whether the United States has “strong” or “weak” republican democracy and to<br />

suggest how it might be made “stronger” and more just. This is an ironic<br />

problem for a thinker who endorses political critique and democracy so<br />

enthusiastically.<br />

The issue of historicity and sociology brings us back to Marx. Howard’s<br />

critique of historical necessity addresses a deeply problematic thread in Marx’s<br />

work. However, he implies that determinism rules Marx’s analysis of<br />

capitalism. Howard does not acknowledge the side of Marx’s work that<br />

stresses sociological inquiry into the specific conditions of particular situations<br />

(i.e., recognizing the contingent nature of the social) and that employs<br />

concepts as heuristic devices (simplifying a contingent empirical world for<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

analytical purposes). Even young Marx countered his Hegelian side with points<br />

about the need to study “definite individuals” sharing historically-specific social<br />

and political relations. However, the materialist transparency promised at the<br />

end of the Manifesto’s famous passage about “all that is solid melts into air” is<br />

replaced, in his mature work, by a warning that the “appearance of simplicity<br />

vanishes.” In Capital, Marx spoke of an “economistic law of motion”<br />

operating with “iron necessity” and leading “inevitably” to proletarian<br />

emancipation. However, he also held that proliferation of “middle and<br />

intermediate strata,” in England, “obliterate lines of demarcation everywhere.”<br />

He understood that advanced capitalism’s complex class relations and<br />

interventionist state posed problems for his political hopes and that his social<br />

theory had to be brought to bear on increasingly diverse types of capitalism.<br />

Late in life, Marx even doubted that full capitalist modernization would<br />

extend beyond western Europe. His sociological uncertainty appears in other<br />

forms. For example, he conditioned his core materialist idea that the pumping<br />

out of surplus product from direct producers is “the hidden basis of the entire<br />

social structure” with the qualification that the process has “infinite variations<br />

and gradations in appearance, which can be ascertained only by analysis of the<br />

empirically given circumstances.” Similar qualifications about empirical<br />

variability appear in other parts of Capital, implying that Marx saw his theory<br />

as a heuristic model as well as the mirror of the Telos of History. The point is<br />

that Marx expressed two types of “historical” narratives—sociological<br />

historicism and Hegelian historicism. Howard criticizes sharply Marx’s<br />

historicism, but his position should be evaluated in the broader light of the<br />

tensions between and entwinement of his determinism and his sociology.<br />

Engels admitted after Marx’s death that he and Marx had exaggerated the<br />

“economic side,” but he also declared famously that their materialist method<br />

claimed nothing more than: “the ultimately determining element in history is<br />

the production of and reproduction of real life.” Holding that “all history<br />

must be studied afresh,” Engels insisted that they created “a guide to study, not<br />

a lever after the manner of the Hegelian.” 3 Engels’s afterthought understates the<br />

determinist thread in Marx’s and his materialism, but it stresses correctly the<br />

importance of their sociological historicism. The master narrative of their texts<br />

is still a matter of debate. However, Howard’s privileging of the “philosophical<br />

Marx” and reducing of his sociological side to Hegelianism understates the<br />

significance of his sociology. The enduring value of Marx’s work derives as<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

much from his sociology as from his normative ideas. His analysis of<br />

capitalism poses still compelling questions about its highly problematic<br />

relationship with democracy. His view that socio-economic matters condition<br />

fundamentally the shape, quality, and possibility of democracy and, thus, need<br />

to be taken account of in theory and practice does not by itself constitute a<br />

sociological reduction of politics. By contrast, unqualified emphasis on the<br />

autonomy of politics does not favor inquiry into the impacts of wealth and<br />

power on democracy, which are often concealed or intentionally suppressed.<br />

Addressing the impacts of expanded corporate power and increased economic<br />

inequality, under neoliberal globalization, is essential to today’s debates over<br />

the prospects for democracy and does not preclude the relative autonomy of<br />

politics or deny other forms exclusion. A theory of radical democracy must<br />

bring to the foreground the unequal and unjust distribution of the material<br />

and cultural means of participation. Marx’s impassioned emphasis on this<br />

matter gives him more than nine lives and is the reason that his specter still<br />

hangs over us today. In this light, Howard’s emphasis on the importance of<br />

Marx’s normative side makes sense. But Marx’s vision of capitalist inequality is<br />

the main point of conjuncture between his philosophy and sociology—his<br />

sociology provides his normative vision of justice specificity and historicity.<br />

That Howard is silent about the relation of capitalism and democracy raises<br />

questions about the methodological adequacy as well as the historicity of his<br />

claims about the autonomy of politics and his dim view of the sociological<br />

moment of criticism.<br />

Arguably Marx founded the tradition of modern “social theory.” Social<br />

theorists frame normative arguments, but their work is distinguished from<br />

earlier types of normative theory by a strong sociological moment. Although<br />

the borders are fluid, social theory’s normative thrust distinguishes it from<br />

more narrowly-focused, empirically-oriented “sociological theory” and social<br />

science. By contrast to religion and metaphysics the legitimacy of social theory<br />

depends on the discursively-mediated, empirical-historical validity of its<br />

“sociological” claims as well as the consistency, persuasiveness, and<br />

emotional/aesthetic force of its normative facets. Social theory’s project of<br />

providing an “historical” alternative to absolutist normative argument is neither<br />

complete nor transparent. First-generation social theorists, like Marx, often<br />

conflated History with history and tried to justify their practice as “science,”<br />

obscuring its normative thrust. Howard rightly criticizes this reduction, which<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

is still a problem today. However, as in Marx’s case, social theorists’ historicist<br />

and scientistic claims have often appeared alongside, in the same texts, valid<br />

types of sociological and normative argument. Today, after multiple waves of<br />

critiques of scientism, theorists sometimes deny or understate social theory’s<br />

empirical-historical side and, thus, lean back toward absolutism or simply fail<br />

to justify their normative practices at all. Howard does not make this error,<br />

but he suggests a rather narrowly construed conception of political theory that<br />

understates the role of sociological contexts in conditioning political action and<br />

political thought. The interdependence of the sociological and political<br />

moments call for a broader view of theory that takes fuller account of the fact<br />

that democracy is a “social thing.”<br />

That confusion still reigns over the nature of social theory and its boundaries<br />

with empirical-historical work has been easy to see in later 20th century<br />

polemics over postmodernism and other interdisciplinary theories. Opposing<br />

sides in these disputes have often pitted science and social theory against each<br />

other. By contrast, these practices, regardless of their independent logics, are<br />

culturally entwined; social theory provides a post-traditional language to debate<br />

the normative directions of science and policy and social science provides the<br />

historical knowledge for social theory arguments, in which normative<br />

justification depends largely on claims about the socio-cultural and political<br />

consequences of the proposed policy regimes. Howard’s critique of historicism<br />

contributes to the project of social theory. His points about the sociological<br />

reduction eroding political responsibility and sapping democratic vitality likely<br />

has as much cultural significance after communism, as they did when Lefort<br />

and Castoriadis posed their ideas. Recall Howard’s passing comment that his<br />

critique of Marxist antipolitics is relevant to neoliberalism; its collective<br />

subject, the rational economizer, and claims about the inevitable impacts of<br />

“market forces” suggest an abdication of political decision parallel to that<br />

generated by Marxist certainty about the emancipatory proletariat and<br />

communism. Hopefully, Howard will follow up on this provocative point,<br />

bringing to bear his broader argument about the political on neoliberalism,<br />

which will likely make his position clearer and perhaps answer the concerns<br />

that I have raised.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003


Robert J. Antonio<br />

Notes<br />

1 Dick Howard, The Spector of Democracy (New York: Columbia University<br />

Press, 2002), p. 287. Further page references to this work are in parentheses in<br />

the text of this essay.<br />

2 “Sociology” is used here to refer to social science, rather than to the explicit<br />

discipline of sociology. Howard identifies Marx’s “economic” theory as<br />

“sociological.” Marx’s historical materialism focuses on the social relationships<br />

by which ruling or dominant classes extract surplus from direct producers. His<br />

“labor theory of value” addresses the capitalist version of this social<br />

relationship.<br />

3 Frederick Engels, “Engels to Conrad Schmidt” and “Engels to Joseph Bloch”<br />

(Letters written in 1890), pp.395-400 in Marx and Engels: Basic Writings on<br />

Politics and Philosophy, edited by Lewis S. Feuer (Garden City, NY: Anchor<br />

Books, 1959).<br />

Robert J. Antonio is professor of Sociology at the University of Kansas.<br />

<strong>Logos</strong> 2.3 – Summer 2003

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!